Cooper Security | M2000 | User`s guide | Cooper Security M2000 User`s guide

M2000
M800
ENGINEERING
MANUAL
HARDWIRED
CONTROL UNIT
MENVIER
SECURITY
© Cooper Security Limited 2010
Every effort has been made to ensure that the contents of this book are correct. However,
neither the authors nor Cooper Security Limited accept any liability for loss or damage caused
or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by this book. The contents of this book are subject
to change without notice.
Cooper Security Limited make every possible effort to update manuals and guides regularly to
reflect changes in the product. If this document does not reflect the function of the product
please let us know. You may be able to download a more recent version of the document from
our website:
www.coopersecurity.co.uk
Printed and published in the UK.
Cooper Security Ltd.,
Security House,
Vantage Point Business Village,
Mitcheldean,
Gloucestershire,
GL17 0SZ
England
Product Support (UK) Tel: +44 (0)1594 541979
Available between:
08:15 to 12:30 and 13:00 to 17:00 Monday to Friday
Product Support Fax: +44 (0)1594 545401.
Contents
Preface ................................................................................................................ vi About this Manual .................................................................................................................................................................. vi Other Publications .................................................................................................................................................................. vi Obsolete Products .................................................................................................................................................................. vi Chapter 1: Introduction ............................................................................................ 1 About the Panels ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1 Control Panel Features ........................................................................................................................................................... 5 Network Ports................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Transistor Outputs .......................................................................................................................................................... 5 Relay Outputs ................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Digital Communicator Outputs ................................................................................................................................. 5 USB and Serial PC Ports ................................................................................................................................................ 5 On-Board Modem........................................................................................................................................................... 5 Printer Port ........................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Engineer's Keypad Port ................................................................................................................................................. 6 CPA6 Output Module Port .......................................................................................................................................... 6 External Bell Output ....................................................................................................................................................... 6 Extension Loudspeaker Connectors ......................................................................................................................... 6 Back Tamper Switch ....................................................................................................................................................... 6 Battery Backup ................................................................................................................................................................. 6 Compatible Devices ................................................................................................................................................................ 6 Keypad ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7 IDNode and MIDNode .................................................................................................................................................. 7 MSNode .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7 MRNode ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8 MSPSU ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8 CPA6 Output Module .................................................................................................................................................... 8 LEC2 ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 LEC6 ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 8600 Relay Card ............................................................................................................................................................... 8 System Wiring ........................................................................................................................................................................... 9 Cable Type ......................................................................................................................................................................... 9 Maximum Cable Distances .......................................................................................................................................... 9 Nodes ............................................................................................................................................................................ 9 Keypads......................................................................................................................................................................... 9 LEC2 ................................................................................................................................................................................ 9 Cable Segregation .......................................................................................................................................................... 9 Mains Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9 Networker Interface Board ........................................................................................................................................11 Calculating Voltage Drop ....................................................................................................................................................11 Voltage Drop Example 1.............................................................................................................................................12 Reducing Voltage Drop - Method 1 ......................................................................................................................13 Reducing Voltage Drop - Method 2 ......................................................................................................................14 i
Contents
Engineering Manual
Remote Power Supplies ............................................................................................................................................. 14 Chapter 2: Getting Started .......................................................................................16 Starting the Panel for the First Time .............................................................................................................................. 16 About Logging in as an Engineer .................................................................................................................................... 17 Logging Out ............................................................................................................................................................................ 17 About the Engineer Menus ................................................................................................................................................ 18 Selecting Menu Options ............................................................................................................................................ 18 Exiting from an Option or Menu ............................................................................................................................ 18 Chapter 3: Using Engineer Menu 1 .............................................................................19 Options in Engineer Menu 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 19 Option 1-1: Programming Zones .............................................................................................................................. 20 Step 1 – Select Zone .................................................................................................................................................... 21 Step 2 – Select Zone Type ......................................................................................................................................... 21 Step 3 – Select Attributes .......................................................................................................................................... 28 Step 4 – Select Zone's Wards................................................................................................................................... 30 Step 5 – Enter Zone Description ............................................................................................................................. 31 Option 1-2: Choosing Advanced Zone Options .................................................................................................. 32 Step 1 – Select Zone Number .................................................................................................................................. 32 Step 2 – Select Zone Resistance ............................................................................................................................. 32 Step 3 – Select Zone's Output Group ................................................................................................................... 33 Option 1-3: Assigning Ward Equipment and Attributes .................................................................................. 34 Option 1-3-1: Assigning Equipment to Wards ......................................................................................... 34 Option 1-3-2: Defining Ward Attributes ..................................................................................................... 35 Option 1-4: Setting Up Outputs ................................................................................................................................ 39 Step 1 – Select Output Type ..................................................................................................................................... 40 Step 2 – Select Output Number .............................................................................................................................. 42 Step 3 – Select Which Item the Output Follows ............................................................................................... 43 Step 4 – Select Ward, Zone, User or Zone Output Group Number........................................................... 43 Step 5 – Select Event to Activate Output ............................................................................................................ 43 System Output Types ............................................................................................................................................ 43 Ward Event Output Types ................................................................................................................................... 53 Zone Event Output Types .................................................................................................................................... 58 User Events ................................................................................................................................................................ 58 Zone Output Group Events ................................................................................................................................. 59 Step 6 – Select the Inversion and Output Mode .............................................................................................. 59 Output Inversion ..................................................................................................................................................... 59 Output Mode ........................................................................................................................................................... 59 Option 1-5: Setting Up Timers ................................................................................................................................... 60 Option 1-5-1: Setting Up Ward Timers ....................................................................................................... 60 Ward Timer Types .................................................................................................................................................. 60 Option 1-5-2: Setting Up System Timers ................................................................................................... 62 System Timer Types ............................................................................................................................................... 62 Options 1-5-3 to 1-5-5: Calendar Timers ................................................................................................... 67 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................... 67 Option 1-5-3 : Exceptions ................................................................................................................................ 68 Step 1 – Select the Exception ............................................................................................................................. 69 Step 2 – Key in a Description ............................................................................................................................. 69 ii
Engineering Manual
Contents
Step 3 – Key in the Start Time and Date ........................................................................................................69 Step 4 – Key in the End Time and Date. .........................................................................................................69 To Clear (Disable) an Exception .........................................................................................................................69 Option 1-5-4: Auto Sets ....................................................................................................................................70 Step 1 – Select an Auto Set .................................................................................................................................71 Step 2 – Key in the Auto Set Description .......................................................................................................71 Step 3 – Key in Set Time/Days ...........................................................................................................................71 Step 4 – Key In the Unset Time/Days ..............................................................................................................71 Step 5 – Select Wards. ...........................................................................................................................................71 Step 6 – Select Exceptions ...................................................................................................................................71 Option 1-5-5: Defining Time Switches .........................................................................................................72 Step 1 – Select the Time Switch .........................................................................................................................73 Step 2 – Key in Description .................................................................................................................................73 Step 3 – Key in Time/Days for Timers (1), (2) & (3) ....................................................................................73 Step 4 – Select Exceptions ...................................................................................................................................73 Overriding a Time Switch’s Status ....................................................................................................................74 Example: Auto Setting .................................................................................................................................................74 Configuration: ...........................................................................................................................................................74 Actions:........................................................................................................................................................................74 Option 1-5-6: Defining Code-Lock Timers .................................................................................................75 Option 1-6: Defining the Setting Mode ..................................................................................................................76 Option 1-7: Customising Text .....................................................................................................................................78 Option 1-8: Setting Up Groups...................................................................................................................................80 Option 1-8-1: Assigning Wards to Groups.................................................................................................80 Option 1-8-2: Setting the Ward Group Exit Mode ..................................................................................81 Option 1-8-3: Setting the Ward Group Timers .........................................................................................82 Option 1-8-4: Setting the Ward Group Alarm Response......................................................................83 Option 1-9: Choosing the Configuration Options ...............................................................................................84 Option 1-9-1: Choosing General Configuration Options .....................................................................84 Option 1-9-2: Choosing DD243 Configuration Options .......................................................................89 Option 1-9-3: Choosing EN50131 Configuration Options ...................................................................91 Option 1-0: Going to User Menu 1 ...........................................................................................................................96 Chapter 4: Using Engineer Menu 2............................................................................. 97 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................................................97 Option 2-1: Viewing Zone Status ...............................................................................................................................98 Option 2-2: Specifying the Time and Date.......................................................................................................... 100 Option 2-3: Setting the Loudspeaker Volume Level........................................................................................ 101 Option 2-4: Changing Your Passcode and Name ............................................................................................. 101 Option 2-5: Setting Up Communications ............................................................................................................ 102 Option 2-5-1: Setting Up the Downloader Options ............................................................................ 102 Option 2-5-1-1 – Defining the Downloader Password .............................................................. 103 Option 2-5-1-2 – Defining the Site Identification ....................................................................... 103 Option 2-5-1-3 – Defining the Access Mode ................................................................................ 104 Option 2-5-1-4: – Editing Call-Back Numbers .............................................................................. 105 Option 2-5-1-5 – Choosing the Modem Options........................................................................ 106 Option 2-5-1-6 Remote Service ......................................................................................................... 106 Option 2-5-2: – Setting Up the DigiCom ................................................................................................. 109 iii
Contents
Engineering Manual
Option 2-5-2-1 – Specifying the Communications Format ......................................................110 Option 2-5-2-2 – Specifying the ARC Number .............................................................................116 Option 2-5-2-3 – Specifying the ARC Account Number ...........................................................117 Option 2-5-2-4 – Specifying the Dialling Mode ...........................................................................117 Option 2-5-2-6 – CID/SIA Reports .....................................................................................................119 Option 2-5-2-7: FF Channels ................................................................................................................119 Option 2-5-2-8: Test Call .......................................................................................................................119 Option 2-5-2-9: Line Fault.....................................................................................................................119 Option 2-5-3: Starting a Call Back ..............................................................................................................119 Option 2-5-3-1 – Connect.....................................................................................................................120 Option 2-5-3-2 – Upload from PC* ...................................................................................................120 Option 2-5-3-3 – Download to PC* ...................................................................................................120 Option 2-5-3-4 – Diagnostic* ..............................................................................................................120 Option 2-5-3-5 – Remote Service*.....................................................................................................120 Option 2-5-4: Setting Up the RS232 Port .........................................................................................................120 Option 2-5-4-1: Setting the Baud Rate ..................................................................................................120 Option 2-5-4-2: Enabling the WebWayOne Interface ......................................................................121 Option 2-6: Setting Up Shunt Groups ...................................................................................................................122 Option 2-7: Running Built-in Tests .........................................................................................................................123 Option 2-7-1: Testing the Power Supply ..................................................................................................123 Option 2-7-2: Testing Outputs .....................................................................................................................124 Option 2-7-2-1 – Testing the "Panel" Outputs .............................................................................125 Option 2-7-2-2 – Testing the Digital Communicator Outputs ................................................125 Option 2-7-2-3 – Testing the Digi On Board Channels .............................................................126 Option 2-7-2-4 – Testing Equipment Outputs ..............................................................................126 Option 2-7-3: Performing Equipment Tests ............................................................................................127 Option 2-7-3-1 – Determining the Software Version .................................................................127 Option 2-7-3-2 – False Setting the System ....................................................................................128 Option 2-7-3-3 – Confirming the Network Devices ....................................................................129 Option 2-7-3-4 – Checking a Zone's Resistance ..........................................................................129 Option 2-7-3-5 – Checking the Status Network Devices ..........................................................130 Option 2-7-3-6 – Viewing Network Errors ......................................................................................131 Option 2-7-3-7 – Resetting User 1 (the default Manager User) .............................................131 Option 2-7-3-8 – Applying Default NVM Settings ......................................................................132 Option 2-7-3-9 – Built In Tests, Equipment, Test Display .........................................................135 Option 2-7-4: Checking the Status of System Inputs ..........................................................................136 Option 2-7-5: Checking the Status of Fuses ...........................................................................................136 Option 2-7-6: Checking the Telecommand Batteries ..........................................................................136 Option 2-7-7: Telecommand Test ...............................................................................................................137 Option 2-8: Viewing or Printing the Log ..............................................................................................................138 Option 2-8-1: Viewing the Event Log ........................................................................................................138 Option 2-8-2: Printing the Event Log ........................................................................................................139 Option 2-8-3: Viewing the Access Log ......................................................................................................139 Option 2-8-4: Printing the Access Log ......................................................................................................140 Option 2-8-5: Printing System Parameters ..............................................................................................140 Log Event Codes .........................................................................................................................................................140 Option 2-9 Telecommand Configuration .............................................................................................................145 iv
Engineering Manual
Contents
Step 1 – Select Telecommand ......................................................................................................................... 146 Step 2 – Select Telecommand Type .............................................................................................................. 146 Step 3 – Program Buttons ................................................................................................................................. 147 Step 4 – Program Telecommand Name ...................................................................................................... 147 5. TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................................... 148 Frequently Asked Questions ........................................................................................................................................... 148 Appendix A: Text Keys .......................................................................................... 151 Appendix B: Installation Quick Start Guide .................................................................. 152 Domestic Simple.................................................................................................................................................................. 152 A basic house............................................................................................................................................................... 152 To program the system............................................................................................................................................ 153 Eng 1 Menu 1 – Program Zones ..................................................................................................................... 153 Eng 1 Menu 8 – Group Options ...................................................................................................................... 153 Eng 1 Menu 3 - Attributes ................................................................................................................................ 154 Eng 1 Menu 7 – Custom Text .......................................................................................................................... 154 User Operation ...................................................................................................................................................... 154 Commercial with Foyer Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 154 To Program the system ............................................................................................................................................ 155 Eng 1 Menu 1 – Program Zones ..................................................................................................................... 155 Eng 1 Menu 3 – Ward Options........................................................................................................................ 155 Eng 1 Menu 5 - Timers ....................................................................................................................................... 156 Eng 1 Menu 6 – Setting Modes ...................................................................................................................... 156 User programming .................................................................................................................................................... 156 User 2 Menu 4 – Edit Codes ............................................................................................................................. 156 Digital Communicator ....................................................................................................................................................... 156 To Program the Communicator ............................................................................................................................ 157 Eng 1 Menu 4 – Outputs ................................................................................................................................... 157 Eng 2 Menu 5 – Communications .................................................................................................................. 157 Test Call.......................................................................................................................................................................... 157 Dynamic Test Call ....................................................................................................................................................... 157 Static Test call .............................................................................................................................................................. 158 Example of programming:- .............................................................................................................................. 158 Appendix C: Compliance Guide................................................................................ 159 DD243: 2004 Compliance ................................................................................................................................................ 159 ACPO PA Reduction Policy .............................................................................................................................................. 160 PD 6662 / prEN 50131-1: 2004 Compliance ............................................................................................................. 160 Configuring Hardware .............................................................................................................................................. 160 Programming for Compliance............................................................................................................................... 160 Engineer Quick Reference ...................................................................................... 161 Index ................................................................................................................. 165 v
Preface
About this Manual
This manual is for engineers who need to install or configure M-Series control panels using
software version 3.11.x. The manual gives an introduction to the features of the panels, provides
general engineering guidelines for planning an installation, and provides full details of the
engineer's menu options.
A full list of engineer menu options, their positions within the menu hierarchy and brief details
of how to use the options is given in the Quick Reference on page 161.
Other Publications
For detailed connection information, please refer to the appropriate Installation Instructions.
Separate installation instructions are provided for each control panel and peripheral device.
For details of how to use the panel's user options, please refer to the Manager's Manual.
The User's Guide provides details of how to set, unset and reset the alarm system and is
intended for end users.
Obsolete Products
At the publication of this manual, the following products are obsolete and no longer supplied
by Cooper Security:
M1000, MKP1, CPA6OM, LEC6, MIDNode, RM3A.
This manual provides information on these items for your assistance when fitting new control
units to existing alarm systems that use older versions of the M-Series family.
Please note that this manual does not provide any information on the M800ID Plus, which does
not support software version 3.11.07.
vi
Chapter 1: Introduction
About the Panels
The M2000 and M800 intruder alarm panels have been designed to satisfy the most demanding
requirements of alarm-systems professionals. The panels are flexible, easy to install and robust,
yet the modular approach of the system hardware ensures that a cost-effective solution is
available for installations of any type or size.
Each control panel supports a different number of programmable zones and provides
alternative network solutions to match the system requirements.
The configuration menus are feature packed for ultimate flexibility, yet are both logical and easy
to use. Systems can be set up with ease, either from a keypad or via a PC running the
Downloader software.
Both panels include a USB connector for a local connection to a Downloader PC. The M2000
also has a Serial (RS232) port, which can be used instead of the USB port if required.
The M2000 and M800 include a built-in modem, which enables direct connection to a
telephone network without the need for an external modem. The modem allows remote
connection to an Alarms Receiving Centre (ARC), or to a PC running the Downloader software.
Each zone can be one of several different types. The zone type determines how the system
responds when a sensor on the zone triggers. For example, for a normal alarm zone type, an
alarm is generated only if a sensor is triggered while the zone is set. For a panic alarm zone
type, an alarm is generated irrespective of whether the system is set.
The system is capable of being divided into separately controlled areas known as "wards", which
enable the premises or parts of the premises to be set or unset independently.
The main differences between the control panels are shown in the following table.
1
Introduction
Engineering Manual
Table 1: Differences between control panel types
Panel Type
Feature
M800
M10001
M2000
EN50131-1/PD6662 grade
(max)
3
3
3
Maximum zones2
40
144
264
Wards
4
8
8
Ward groups (part sets)
4
4
8
User codes (including 1
engineer code)
50
100
251
Network ports
23
23
23
On-board zones
8
8
8
Digital communicator outputs
16
16
16
On-board transistor outputs
2
3
3
On-board relay outputs
1
2
2
On-board modem
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5
18
31
No
Yes
Yes
Event log entries
1000
2000
3000
Shunt groups
5
10
10
CPA6 output module port
4
No. CPA6 modules supported
Serial port
5
The following figures illustrate the network architecture of each type of panel.
) See "Compatible Devices" on page 6 for details of compatible devices, including keypads,
LECs, MSNodes, MRNodes, and MSPSUs,
1
2
The M1000 is obsolete.
2
Each panel includes eight on-board zones.
3
On an M2000 networks 1 and 2 can both connect to keypads or Nodes. On a M800/M1000 network 1 can
connect to keypads and LECs only.
4
CPA6OM is now obsolete.
5
All panels include a USB port.
Engineering Manual
Introduction
Network 1 (Supports only remot e keypads and LEC2s)
Max 4
1 Output
1 Output
1 Output
1 Output
100m ma x to
furthest
keypad/LEC2
Network 1
M750/M800
CONTROL
PANEL
Network 2
2 Zones
Network Wiring = 6 Core
2 Zones
Network 2 - Wiring Option 1
MSNodes
2 Zones
Max 3
2 Outputs
100m max
MSNode
1
1 Output
100m max
8 Zones
3 Outputs
8 Zones
Engineer’s keypad
(cannot have zones
or outputs)
2 Zones
MRNode
2
MSPSU
3
8 Zones
8 Zones
300m max
to furthest
MSNode
A MSNode is
capable of driving 4
Remote Keypads and
a Loudspeaker
NOTE:
Do not connect an MSPSU,
MSNode or MRNode directly
100m max to
to the same network as an
furthest keypad
MIDNode or keypad.
Max 4
Network Wiring = 4 Core
Network 2 - Wiring Optio n 2
Remot e Keypads/LEC2s
Max 3
1 Output
1 Output
1 Output
100m ma x to
furthest
keypad/LEC2
Network Wiring = 6 C ore
Network 2 - Wiring Optio n 3
MIDNode or ID Node
2 Zones
2 Zones
6 Outputs
ID Node
24 ID Zones
Network Wiring = 4 Core
2 Zones
Only one MIDNode/ID Node
can be connected
(configured to occupy
addresses 1, 2 and 3)
NOTE:
Do not connect an MSPSU,
MSNode or MRNode directly
to the same network as an
MIDNode or keypad.
Figure 1) Network Architecture for M800 Control Panel
3
Introduction
Network 1
2000
CONTROL
PANEL
Engineering Manual
Wiring Option 1
MSNodes
Max 16
2 Outputs
100m max
MSNode
1
1 Output
100m max
8 Zones
Network 2
MRNode
2
MSPSU
16
8 Zones
1 km max
to furthest
MSNode
8 Zones
An MSNode/MSPSU is
capable of driving 4
Remote Keypads and
a Loudspeake r
NOTE:
Do not connect an MSPSU,
MSNode, or MRNode directly
to the same network as an
100m max to
MIDNode or keypad.
furthest keypad
Max 4
5 Outputs
8 Zones
Engineer’s keypad (cannot
have zones or outputs).
Note: When plugged in,
an engineer’s keypad is
connected to network 1.
This may interfere with the
corrrect function of any
attached MSPSU,
Wiring Option 2
Remote Keypads/LEC2s
1 Output
1 Output
Max 5
1 Output
1 Output
100m max to
furthest
keypad/LEC2
MSNode, or MRNode
2 Zones
2 Zones
Network Wiring = 6 Core
Wiring Option 3
MIDNode/IDNode
2 Zones
2 Zones
2 Zones (see note
below)
8 Outputs
MIDNode/ID Node
30 ID Zones
Figure 2) Network Architecture for the M2000 Control Panel
4
1 Output
Maximum of 120 zones
with four MIDNodes.
Maximum of 40 zones
with two IDNodes.
NOTE:
Do not connect an MSPSU,
MSNode, or MRNode directly
to the same network as an
MIDNode/IDNode.
Engineering Manual
Introduction
Control Panel Features
The control panels benefit from the following features.
Network Ports
The network ports enable additional devices to be connected to the control panel for system
expansion. The number of networks and the devices available for networking depend on the
control panel used.
Transistor Outputs
Each control panel contains programmable transistor outputs, which provide control for
external equipment:
Depending on panel type, one or two outputs are switched negative. These switch from 12Vdc
to 0V on activation, and in this mode can sink up to 500mA from a 12Vdc source.
One output is switched positive. This switches from 0V to 12Vdc on activation, and can deliver
up to 500mA to an external load.
Relay Outputs
Relay outputs provide voltage-free changeover contacts, which can be programmed to switch
external equipment on or off. Depending on panel type, there are one or two relay outputs.
Digital Communicator Outputs
These outputs are normally connected to a digital communicator – a device that transmits the
status of each output to an Alarm Receiving Centre. The panel provides 16 programmable
outputs, depending on panel type. Each output can be programmed as required, e.g. to indicate
a zone alarm.
If required, the outputs may alternatively be used to drive low-power devices such as LEDs.
By default, each output is switched negative, i.e. normally at +12Vdc and switches to 0V when
active. When at 0V, the output can sink up to 100mA.
If required, the sense can be reversed during system configuration, i.e. normally at +0V and
switches to 12Vdc when active. In this case, when switching to +12Vdc, each output can source
up to 5mA to an external load.
USB and Serial PC Ports
Optionally, a PC running the Downloader software can be connected to the control panel for
system configuration and data uploading. The PC can connect to the panel's USB port, or
optionally on an M2000, via the Serial (RS232) port.
Note: Cooper Security recommend that you use a USB lead 1.5 m or shorter when connecting
to the control panel. Make sure that you use only good quality USB cables.
On-Board Modem
On M2000 and M800 an on-board modem allows the control panel to be connected to a
remote PC running the Downloader software, and alarm status information to be transmitted to
an Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC).
5
Introduction
Engineering Manual
The control panel can be easily connected to the telephone network using the on-board RJ11
telecom socket. Alternatively, a PSTN terminal block is provided for optional wired connection.
More recent versions of the control unit pcbs also provide molex connectors for a plug-on adsl
filter: Cooper Security part ADSL01.
Printer Port
A serial printer such as a DATAC printer can connect to the control panel to obtain system and
log print outs, or to print all system events as they occur.
Engineer's Keypad Port
Optionally, an engineer's keypad can be temporarily connected directly to the "Engineer's
Keypad" port on the control panel. The keypad can be disconnected without causing a tamper
alarm.
An engineer's keypad is intended to be temporary connected to the control panel for system
configuration and testing at the control panel. The keypad can be disconnected without causing
an alarm. Once a system has been set up, system configuration should normally be carried out
from a standard keypad.
CPA6 Output Module Port
Both panels include a port for CPA6 Output Modules (page 8). (Note that the CPA6OM is now
obsolete.)
External Bell Output
The control panel has one external bell output to drive standard Self-Activating Bell (SAB) or
Self-Contained Bell (SCB) modules. Additional external sounders can be driven from MSNodes
using, for example, the 8600 relay module (ensure that the 1A rating of the relay module is
adequate for the sounder). You will need an external 12V power supply to drive external
sounders switched by an 8600 relay module.
Extension Loudspeaker Connectors
Up to two extension loudspeakers can be connected to the control panel (or one on any
MSNode).
Back Tamper Switch
The back tamper switch ensures that unauthorised removal of the lid can generate an alarm
condition.
Battery Backup
The control panel can be fitted with a 7AH or 17AH battery to enable the system to function in
the event of a mains failure.
Compatible Devices
System expansion is achieved by using the following devices.
6
Engineering Manual
Introduction
Keypad
Keypads enable setting, unsetting and programming of the system. The system must have at
least one keypad. Each keypad provides an additional two zones and one switched-negative
programmable output.
The following types of keypad are available.
MKP1 – This keypad is now obsolete. However, where it is part of an existing installation it will
continue to work if you upgrade the control unit to software version 3.11.
MKP2 – This keypad has a back-lit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), a Power LED, and a programmable
Function LED. The keypad supports 3-resistor anti-masking zones.
MKP3 – This is similar to the MKP2, but has a built-in proximity module that enables users to
identify themselves to the system by presenting a proximity tag or card. In addition the keypad
has an extra connector for an external proximity reader.
NOTE:
The programmable output available on the keypad PCB is electronically linked to the
lower LED on the display. The LED is active when the output is active. There is a jumper
link “LED mimic” on the keypad pcb that you can remove if you wish the lower LED to
stay dark.
By default the keypad output is programmed as “Pending”. This means that it becomes
active if there are two (or more) alerts pending.
When connected to an MSNode, the keypad output follows one of the two outputs on the
MSNode. To program the function of the keypad output you must program the function of
one or other of the MSNode outputs.
To select which output the keypads will follow:
Give the keypad an even address (2 or 4) to follow output 2.
Give the keypad an odd address (1 or 3) to follow output 1.
Note that the zones on keypads attached to MSNodes do not provide extra zones over
and above the eight zone provided by the MSNode.
IDNode and MIDNode
(Note that IDNodes and MIDNodes are now obsolete.) IDNodes and MIDNodes provide up to
eight additional programmable outputs (four switched positive and four switched negative) and
30 additional zones using a single ID detector loop.
A single IDNode or MIDNode can be connected to a network on an M800 control panel. Up to
24 zones and six outputs (three switched positive and three switched negative) can be used.
When using IDNodes, a maximum of two IDNodes can connect to a network on an
M1000/M2000 panel, and up to 40 zones can be used. When using MIDNodes, a maximum of
four MIDNodes can connect to a network on an M1000/M2000 panel, and up to 120 zones can
be used.
MSNode
The MSNode provides:
Eight zones, capable of supporting closed circuit, Fully supervised loop (FSL) or threeresistor anti-masking zones.
7
Introduction
Engineering Manual
Two programmable outputs (one switched positive and one switched negative).
Connection for up to four keypads.
Support for one loudspeaker.
MRNode
By fitting one or more MRNodes to a system the installer can employ a variety of wirefree
detectors to protect areas without running extra cabling. In addition, the user gains the ability to
set and unset the system using radio telecommands, or start panic alarms using PA transmitters.
The MRNode connects to the control unit over the standard network cabling. The control unit
treats the wire free detectors as standard zones. Each MRNode can support up to eight
detectors, plus any combination of telecommands or PA up to a maximum of eight devices.
MSPSU
The MSPSU has an on-board power supply, which provides power for devices connected to the
MSPSU, or for other devices on the network. The MSPSU also enables the system to be
expanded by an extra eight zones and one programmable output. The zones can connect to
movement detectors, smoke detectors, panic buttons or other sensors. You may also connect
up to four keypads and one extension loudspeaker to the MSPSU.
Note: The MSPSU acts as an MSNode and can replace one of these nodes on the network.
Consequently, each MSPSU added reduces the allowable number of MSNodes by one.
WARNING: This device may contain mains voltages.
CPA6 Output Module
The CPA6 Output Module (now obsolete) provides eight switched-negative programmable
outputs rated at 100mA, which can be used to drive LEDs or relays, perhaps to give ward status
information and/or zone alarm indications.
See page 2 for details of how many modules can be connected to each control unit.
LEC2
The LEC2 expander provides two zones and one switched-negative output. Note that a LEC2
must not share a network with a Node or MSPSU.
LEC6
(Now obsolete.) Direct connection of an LEC6 (6-zone) expander to a control panel network port
is supported for existing systems that are being upgraded. Ensure that the number of zones
does not exceed the number that could be provided by keypads alone. Note that a LEC6 must
not share a network with a Node or MSPSU.
8600 Relay Card
The 8600 Relay Card allows you to convert the on board digital communicator outputs from
transistor outputs to voltage free relay outputs. Each 8600 provides eight relays. Later M800 and
M2000 pcbs provide connectors for the cables supplied with the 8600.
8
Engineering Manual
Introduction
System Wiring
Cable Type
In general, the panel requires standard 7/0.2 un-screened alarm cable for wiring to MSNodes,
MRNodes, MSPSUs, keypads, LEC2s, and zone sensors. The number of cores varies, depending
on the device being connected.
Screened cable may prove necessary if the installation site has equipment that produces high
levels of R.F. (Radio Frequencies), for example heavy industrial plant such as welding equipment.
See “General Wiring Considerations” in the M800 and M2000 Installation Instructions.
Maximum Cable Distances
Nodes
The distance between a control panel and node (MSNode, MRNode, MSPSU), or between any
two nodes must not exceed 100m. The distance from the control panel to furthest node must
not exceed 400m for a M800 or 1km for an M2000. See Figure 3).
Keypads
The distance from a control panel, MSNode or MSPSU to the furthest keypad on the chain must
not exceed 100m (see Figure 3).
Note: Do not connect keypads to the same network wiring as an MRNode (or any other node).
However, you can connect keypads to MSNodes or MSPSUs, but not MRNodes.
LEC2
The distance from a control panel to the furthest LEC2 must not exceed 100m.
Cable Segregation
All network and zone wiring must be segregated from any other wiring, such as mains supply
cables, telephone cables, computer network cables and R.F. cables. In addition, the network and
detection zone cables should be kept clear of cables supplying sounders or extension
loudspeakers.
) Do not route more than one network down a single multi-core cable.
Mains Wiring
All mains wiring must be carried out only by a qualified electrician and must comply with
current local regulations.
9
Introduction
Engineering Manual
M800: 400m max. M2000: 1 km max.
100 metres
CONTROL
PANEL
Data
Network
MSNode/
MSPSU
MSNode/
MSPSU
I/D=1
4-Core
100 metres
100 metres
Out
In
MSNode/
MSPSU
I/D=2
In
MSNode/
MSPSU
I/D=3
Out
100 metres
100 metres
In
MSNode/
MSPSU
I/D=4
Out
MSNode/
MSPSU
I/D=5
Out
In
100 metres
In
Daisy-chained Connections
I/D=6
Out
In
Note: M2000 can use
up to 16 expanders per
network.
M800: 400m max. M2000: 1 km max.
100 metres
CONTROL
PANEL
Data
Network
MSNode/
MSPSU
I/D=1
4-Core
100 metres
100 metres
In
Out
MSNode/
MSPSU
I/D=3
Out
In
MSNode/
MSPSU
I/D=2
In
100 metres
MSNode/
MSPSU
100 metres
MSNode/
MSPSU
I/D=6
In
I/D=7
Out
In
MSNode/
MSPSU
I/D=4
Out
In
Out
NOTE:
Cooper Security recommend that
the maximum number of branches
that can be “Star” connected from
the output of the MSNode, MSPSU or
control panel is 3 per network.
MSNode/
MSPSU
I/D=5
In
Out
Star and Daisy-chained Connections
Figure 3) Maximum Distances to MSNodes
CONTROL
PANEL
100m max
100m max
MSNode
/MSPSU
Keypad s
CONTROL
PANEL
100m max
Keypads/LEC2s
Figure 4) Maximum Distances to Keypads/LEC2s
10
Out
Out
MSNode/
MSPSU
I/D=8
In
Out
Engineering Manual
Introduction
Networker Interface Board
A Networker Interface Board (NIB) enables the maximum distance from a control panel to an
MSNode, MRNode. MSPSU, MIDNode, IDNode or keypad to be increased to 1km.
The NIB is supplied as a driver unit and receiver unit. The driver unit connects to the output of
the control panel and the receiver unit can be connected up to 1km away. A separate remote
power supply unit is required at the receiver unit.
Calculating Voltage Drop
In order for the system to work correctly, the voltage at each device must NOT drop below
10.5V. Cooper Security recommend that for reliable working while mains power is present you
should ensure that the voltage at each device is above 12.0V.
Standard 7/0.2 alarm cable has a resistance of 8Ohms per 100m per core. The voltage drop is
calculated using the following formula: V Drop = Current drawn x cable length x 0.08 x 2
The shaded area of the table shows where the voltage drop exceeds 1.6V. Since the voltage of
the A and B connections on the network cabling is 13.6V at the control panel, the shaded area
represents cable lengths and current drawn combinations where the voltage drops below 12V.
11
Introduction
Engineering Manual
Table 1. Voltage Drop
Current
Drawn
60mA
80mA
100mA
120mA
140mA
160mA
180mA
200mA
220mA
240mA
260mA
280mA
300mA
320mA
340mA
360mA
380mA
400mA
420mA
440mA
460mA
480mA
500mA
520mA
540mA
560mA
580mA
600mA
Cable Length (Standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)
10m
0.10V
0.13V
0.16V
0.19V
0.22V
0.26V
0.29V
0.32V
0.35V
0.38V
0.42V
0.45V
0.48V
0.51V
0.54V
0.58V
0.61V
0.64V
0.67V
0.70V
0.74V
0.79V
0.80V
0.83V
0.86V
0.90V
0.93V
0.96V
20m
0.19V
0.26V
0.32V
0.38V
0.45V
0.51V
0.58V
0.64V
0.70V
0.79V
0.83V
0.90V
0.96V
1.02V
1.09V
1.15V
1.22V
1.28V
1.34V
1.41V
1.47V
1.54V
1.60V
1.66V
1.73V
1.79V
1.86V
1.92V
30m
0.29V
0.38V
0.48V
0.58V
0.67V
0.77V
0.86V
0.96V
1.06V
1.15V
1.25V
1.34V
1.44V
1.55V
1.63V
1.73V
1.82V
1.92V
2.02V
2.11V
2.21V
2.30V
2.40V
2.50V
2.59V
2.69V
2.78V
2.88V
40m
0.38V
0.51V
0.64V
0.79V
0.90V
1.02V
1.15V
1.28V
1.41V
1.54V
1.66V
1.79V
1.92V
2.05V
2.18V
2.30V
2.43V
2.56V
2.69V
2.82V
2.94V
3.07V
3.20V
3.33V
3.46V
3.58V
3.71V
3.84V
50m
0.48V
0.64V
0.80V
0.96V
1.12V
1.28V
1.44V
1.60V
1.76V
1.92V
2.08V
2.24V
2.40V
2.56V
2.72V
2.88V
3.04V
3.20V
3.36V
3.52V
3.68V
3.84V
4.00V
4.16V
4.32V
4.48V
4.64V
4.80V
60m
0.58V
0.79V
0.96V
1.15V
1.34V
1.54V
1.73V
1.92V
2.11V
2.30V
2.50V
2.69V
2.88V
3.07V
3.26V
3.46V
3.65V
3.84V
4.03V
4.22V
4.42V
4.61V
4.80V
4.99V
5.18V
5.38V
5.57V
5.76V
70m
0.67V
0.90V
1.12V
1.34V
1.57V
1.79V
2.02V
2.24V
2.46V
2.69V
2.91V
3.14V
3.36V
3.58V
3.81V
4.03V
4.26V
4.48V
4.70V
4.93V
5.15V
5.38V
5.60V
5.82V
6.05V
6.27V
6.50V
6.72V
80m
0.77V
1.02V
1.28V
1.54V
1.79V
2.05V
2.30V
2.56V
2.82V
3.07V
3.33V
3.58V
3.84V
4.10V
4.35V
4.61V
4.86V
5.12V
5.38V
5.63V
5.89V
6.14V
6.40V
6.66V
6.92V
7.17V
7.42V
7.68V
90m
0.86V
1.15V
1.44V
1.74V
2.02V
2.30V
2.59V
2.88V
3.17V
3.46V
3.74V
4.03V
4.32V
4.61V
4.90V
5.18V
5.47V
5.76V
6.05V
6.34V
6.62V
6.91V
7.20V
7.49V
7.78V
8.06V
8.35V
8.64V
100m
0.96V
1.28V
1.60V
1.92V
2.24V
2.56V
2.88V
3.20V
3.52V
3.84V
4.16V
4.48V
4.80V
5.12V
5.44V
5.76V
6.08V
6.40V
6.72V
7.04V
7.36V
7.68V
8.00V
8.32V
8.64V
8.96V
9.28V
9.60V
Voltage Drop Example 1
Figure 5) shows two devices connected to the control unit. The first is 20m from the control unit
and has 60mA being taken from its auxiliary supply to power detectors. The second is 20m from
the first and also has 60mA being taken from its auxiliary supply to power detectors. The
example shows that the voltage levels at both nodes is acceptable. The voltage at each device is
as follows:
1.
The total current being drawn at the first device = 120mA + 120mA = 240mA.
2.
Voltage drop to the first device = 240mA @ 20m = 0.79V (see table).
3.
Voltage at first device = control unit voltage - voltage drop = 13.60 -0.79 = 12.81V.
4.
The total current being drawn at the second device = 120mA.
5.
Voltage drop to the second device = 120mA @ 20m = 0.38 (see table).
6.
Voltage at second node = first device voltage - voltage drop = 12.81 - 0.38 = 12.43V.
Voltage Drop Example 2
The second example in figure 5) shows what happens when a third device is connected 20
metres from the second.
12
Engineering Manual
Introduction
The voltage at each device is as follows:
1.
The total current being drawn at the first device = 120mA + 120mA +120mA = 360mA.
2.
Voltage drop to the first device = 360mA @ 20m = 1.15V (see table).
3.
Voltage at first device = control unit voltage - voltage drop = 13.60 -1.15 = 12.45V.
4.
The total current being drawn at the second device = 120mA + 120mA = 240mA.
5.
Voltage drop to the second device = 240mA @ 20m = 0.79V (see table).
6.
Voltage at second device = first device voltage - voltage drop = 12.45 - 0.79 = 11.66V.
7.
The total current being drawn at the third device = 120mA.
8.
Voltage drop to the third device = 120mA @ 20m = 0.38V (see table).
9.
Voltage at third device = second device voltage - voltage drop = 11.66 - 0.38 = 11.28V.
The second example shows that when the third device is added to the network the current
drawn at each is increased and therefore the voltage drop is also increased. The voltage levels
at the second and third devices are now below the recommended 12V threshold and may cause
problems (even though the voltages are above the absolute minimum 10.5V threshold).
Example 1
20m
20m
Control Panel
I = 240 mA
A(+)
B(-)
Network
Node 1
I = 120 mA
Node = 60mA
Total = 120mA
Total = 120mA
AUX
AUX
60mA taken by detectors
Voltage at panel
Example 2
60mA taken by detectors
Voltage at Node
13.60 V
Node 2
Node = 60mA
Voltage at Node
12.81 V
12.43 V
20m
20m
20m
Control Panel
I = 360 mA
A (+)
B (-)
Network
Node 1
I = 120 mA
Node 3
Node = 60mA
Total = 120mA
Total = 120mA
Total = 120mA
60mA taken by detectors
13.60 V
Node 2
Node = 60mA
AUX
Voltage at panel
I = 240 mA
Node = 60mA
Voltage at Node
12.45 V
AUX
60mA taken by detectors
Voltage at Node
11.66 V
AUX
60mA taken by detectors
Voltage at Node
11.28 V
Figure 5) Voltage Drop Examples 1 & 2
Reducing Voltage Drop - Method 1
The simplest way to reduce voltage drop is to double up the supply connections (A & B), which
will halve the resistance on each core and therefore halve the voltage drop. When using the
13
Introduction
Engineering Manual
voltage drop table to calculate the expected voltage drop, simply divide the voltage drop by
two. Figure 6) shows the same three nodes used in the previous example. The A and B network
connections have been doubled up; in order to do so the network cable must have two spare
cores. This method shows that voltage levels at all nodes is at a sufficient level.
Reducing Voltage Drop - Method 2
The second method to reduce voltage drop is to supply the detection devices from separate
cores. This is the preferred method of reducing voltage drop as detectors generally operate at
lower voltages (9.5V). When using this method, the network cable must have two spare cores.
This method shows that voltage levels at all nodes is at a sufficient level.
20m
Method 1
20m
20m
Control Panel
I = 360 mA
A (+)
B (-)
Network
Node 1
I = 240 mA
Total = 120mA
Total = 120mA
Total = 120mA
AUX
AUX
60mA taken by detectors
60mA taken by detectors
Voltage at Node
Voltage at Node
Voltage at Node
13.02 V
12.64 V
12.45 V
20m
Method 2
Node 3
Node = 60mA
60mA taken by detectors
13.60 V
I = 180 mA
Node = 60mA
AUX
Voltage at panel
Node 2
Node = 60mA
20m
20m
Control Panel
I = 180 mA
A (+)
B (-)
Network
Aux
Node 1
I = 120 mA
Node = 60mA
I = 180 mA
Node 2
13.60 V
Node 3
Node = 60mA
Total = 60mA
Total = 60mA
Total = 60mA
Voltage at Node
Voltage at Node
Voltage at Node
13.02 V
I = 120 mA
12.64 V
+Ve
-Ve
Voltage at panel
I = 60 mA
Node = 60mA
60mA taken by detectors
60mA taken by detectors
I = 60 mA
12.45 V
60mA taken by detectors
Voltage at detectors
Voltage at detectors
Voltage at detectors
13.02 V
12.64 V
12.45 V
Figure 6) Reducing Voltage Drop - Methods 1 & 2
Remote Power Supplies
When voltage drops cannot be overcome by using the two methods previously described or the
demand on the control panel power supply exceeds its capacity (as documented in the panel's
Installation Instructions), one or more remote power supplies will need to be installed. The
supply must have a "floating zero rail" if connected to the network, otherwise an earth fault will
occur. Cooper Security also recommend that you use a monitored power supply. The MSPSU
meets both of these requirements. When installing a remote power supply, you should install it
close to the equipment it is powering.
14
Engineering Manual
Introduction
Figure 7) shows the recommended method of installing a remote power supply. When
connected as shown the last node has sufficient voltage level.
120mA taken by detectors
Aux
Node 3
MSPSU Node
IN
OUT
A B
A B
(+)(-)
(+)(-)
20m
14m
Node 1
Control unit
Network
A (+)
B (-)
21m
Node 2
Node = 60mA
Node = 60mA
Total = 180mA
Total = 180mA
I=360mA
I=180mA
A (+)
B (-)
IN
Voltage at unit:
13.6V
Node 4
Node = 60mA
Total = 180mA
OUT
I=180mA
A (+)
B (-)
IN
OUT
Aux
Aux
120mA taken by detectors
120mA taken by detectors
Voltage at node:
12.8V
Voltage at node:
12.2V
A (+)
B (-)
IN
Aux
120mA taken by detectors
Voltage at MPSU:
13.6V
Voltage at node:
13.02V
Figure 7) Connecting Remote Power Supply Units
15
Chapter 2: Getting Started
Starting the Panel for the First Time
Use the following procedure when starting a new system:
1.
Follow the power-up procedure documented in the
Installation Instructions. Make sure you apply a factory
restart to ensure that the system begins with its
factory default settings loaded.
The screen shows a start-up message similar to the
one at the right (text may vary depending on keypad):
SW VERSION
1.09 Jan 26 2007
2.
If the panel's lid is off, the sounder may start soon
after power is switched on. This indicates a tamper
alarm.
3.
You may see following message:
! Alerts !
00:00 19 Mon 01 JAN
Enter your engineer code (default 1234).
Country
UK PD6662 Grade 2
4.
The screen shows:
At this point you can select one of two sets of defaults:
either PD6662 Grade 2, or PD6662 Grade 3. See page
133 for a listing of the default values. (If necessary, use
option 2-7-3-8 to change defaults at a later
date, see page 132.)
5.
Press | or ¬ to select the defaults followed by [.
(Alternatively, press either 1 for Grade 2, or 2 for Grade
3.)
Note: If you select Grade 3 when starting the control unit
for the first time (or when returning a control unit to
its factory defaults) then the Engineer’s default code is
123400. If you select Grade 2 the default code is 1234.
6.
The screen shows:
Language
English
Press | or ¬ to select the language used on the
keypad display, followed by [. (Note that the
software version may allow only one language.) The
screen shows:
[ENT] to CONFIRM
000 LECS
The next messages show the number of each type of
device found. EXP KEYPADS are keypads on an
16
Engineering Manual
Getting Started
MSNode. NODES include MIDNodes, IDNodes and TS
Nodes.
If the number of devices detected is not as expected,
check the connections to the devices and their address
settings (normally set by a link on the device's PCB).
7.
Press [ until you see the following:
8.
Press ]. After a few seconds the display shows:
Equipment
Confirmed
Engineer Level 1
Press [ENT] or [2]
You are now logged on as an engineer and are ready
to configure the system.
About Logging in as an Engineer
Logging in as an engineer causes other keypads connected directly to the same network or
MSNode to display "System Busy". Keypads connected to a different network or MSNode
display ”Engineer on Site", and other engineers or users can log on to these.
You set the factory default engineer code when starting the control unit for the first time (see
page 16) and selecting the default security Grade. For Grade 2 the factory default engineer code
is 1234. For Grade 3 the factory default engineer code is 123400. In addition, you can change
the system between four digit or six digit access codes (see page 91). If the system is set up for
6-digit codes, the default is 123400.
You will not be able to log in as an engineer if:
Another engineer or user is currently logged in at the keypad that you using.
A user has fully set the system (i.e. all wards armed).
Note that you are able to log in if the system was set by an engineer or is partially set (i.e.
not all wards armed). This latter case enables you to log in if, for example, the site has
safes or other "strong" areas that are often armed throughout the day.
A user has prevented you from gaining access using User option 1-9.
The Hi Security Eng configuration option is selected (page 88) and you do not have a "remote
reset" code.
Logging Out
If you want to log out (i.e. exit from the Engineer menus completely), keep pressing ] until you
see the following, then press [.
Press [Ent] To
Leave Menus
17
Getting Started
Engineering Manual
Logging out also logs out any other engineer currently logged in at a different keypad. If you
have been using more than one keypad, this prevents you from having to check each keypad
before you leave the site.
About the Engineer Menus
The options in the Engineer menus enable you to perform tasks such as setting up the system,
performing tests and viewing logged information. It is essential to configure the intruder panel
using the Engineer menu options before you hand over the system to the end user.
There are two top-level Engineer menus:
Engineer Menu 1, as described in Chapter 3. Engineer Menu 1 contains the options shown on
page 19.
Engineer Menu 2, as described in Chapter 4. Engineer Menu 2 contains the options shown on
page 97.
A full list of options and their positions within the menu hierarchy is given in the Quick
Reference on page 161.
Selecting Menu Options
To select an engineer option:
1.
Press the | or ¬ button to scroll to Engineer Menu 1 or 2, then press [ to enter that
menu. Alternatively, press hotkey 1 (for Engineer Menu 1) or hotkey 2 (for Engineer
Menu 2), then [.
2.
Once you are in an Engineer menu, use the scroll keys (| or ¬) or hotkeys to select the
required option. The option may itself be a menu containing further options.
In some cases, options are available only by scrolling.
Exiting from an Option or Menu
Pressing the ] key takes you one step back in the menu hierarchy or one step back in a
procedure (such as the procedure used by the Program Zones option described on page 20).
Note: IMPORTANT - When you return the system to user mode the control unit stores any
changes you have made. If you power down the system before returning to user mode then the
control unit will lose all the changes you made during that session.
18
Chapter 3: Using Engineer Menu 1
Options in Engineer Menu 1
The flowchart shown opposite
illustrates the options in Engineer
Menu 1.
) The order of the options in
Engineer Menu 1 reflects the
typical order that the options
should be used to set up a
system.
Engineer Level 1
Press [Ent]or[2]
0
See boxed Note at left.
[
Eng 1 Menu 1
Program Zones
|
Use | or ¬ to scroll through
options, or press hot key (1-0)
Eng 1 Menu 2
Zones Advanced
|
Note:
If you press 0 when the display
shows “Engineer Level 1” then the
display shows the start of a short
menu that lets you see the panel
panel location text and keypad
address, see diagram below. Press
1 to see the panel location text. If
there is not text stored the keypad
display shows “Text not available”.
Use option 1-7-2 to key in a
suitable text (see page 78). Press 2
to see the keypad address. Press ]
to return to Engineer Level 1.
Engineer Level 1
Press [Ent]or[2]
|
Eng 1 Menu 4
Outputs
|
Eng 1 Menu 5
Timers
|
Eng 1 Menu 6
Setting Modes
|
Eng 1 Menu 7
Custom Text
|
Eng 1 Menu 8
Group Options
0
Location Of : 1,Panel 2,Keypad
]
Eng 1 Menu 3
Ward Options
|
Eng 1 Menu 9
Configuration
1
PANEL LOCATION
TEXT NOT SETUP
|
2
Keypad Address :Net 1 Device 01
Eng 1 Menu 0
Goto User Menu 1
|
19
Engineer Menu 1-1
Engineering Manual
Option 1-1: Programming Zones
Eng 1 Menu 1
Program Zones
[
1. SELECT ZONE NUMBER
Locatio n
Panel Zone 1
0001 Not Used
Zone No.
Zone type
Indicates device
that zone is on
e.g. r
Zone no. (network 1,
device 01, zone A)
To select the zone number :
• Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
• Press r to choose zone on next network
(e.g. to change 0001 to 1001), o r
• Enter zone number (e.g. 0002)
1,01A Remote
1011 Not Used
Network
Zone
[
Device
2. SELECT ZONE TYPE
Zone description
- NO TEXT 1011>Not Used
e.g. |
- NO TEXT 1011>Normal Alm
[
The top line displays "NO TEXT" if the zone
description is not yet define d.
To select zone typ e:
• Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
• Press the zone type hot key (1-9)
PressB if you want to copy the previously
programmed zon e.
Press[ to save changes and continue
3. SELECT
ATTRIBUTE
S
Zone type
Zone no.
1011 Normal Alm
ACCESS
NO
Attribute type
YES or NO
e.g. |
To select attribut e:
• Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
• Press the attribute hot key (1-9)
1011 Normal Alm
DOUBLE KNOCK NO
r
Pressr to toggle YES/NO. You can modify
more than one attribute for the zone
1011 Normal Alm
DOUBLE KNOCK YES
[
Press [ to save changes and continue
4. SELECT ZONE'S
WARDS
1011 is in
Ward > 1*******
e.g. 2
1011 is in
Ward > 12******
[
Press [ to save changes and continue
5. ENTER ZONE DESCRIPT
Cursor
^ Description
Use the keys similar to the keys on a
mobile phone (see Appendix A). Press|
or ¬ to move cursor to next characte r.
Press[ to save changes and continue
20
Press the relevant ward number to add or
remove ward s. * indicates zone is not in
ward. On the M2000 pane l, scrolling displays
the higher ward blocks
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-1
) Except when in Walk Test mode (User option 1-1-2), all programmed zone types are active
and can be communicated to an ARC, even while an engineer is logged in. If the system is
connected to an ARC and work carried out the system could cause alarms to trigger, it is
recommended that you contact the ARC before work begins to avoid any unnecessary callouts.
You must program each zone using Engineer option 1-1 in order for the system to function
correctly. The number of available zones depends on the panel type and expansion devices you
are using (see page 2).
Use the following steps and the flowchart on the previous page to program a zone.
) Advanced zone programming options are available in option 1-2.
Step 1 – Select Zone
The 4-digit number shown in the bottom-left corner of the display indicates the zone to be
programmed.
For all zones:
The first digit is the network number. This is the network number of the device that the
zone is connected to (0 for zones connected to the control panel PCB). The number of
available networks depends on the type of control unit; see pages 3 to 4 .
The next two digits specify the device address that the zone is connected to (00 for zones
connected to the control panel PCB). For devices such as keypads, the device address is
determined by a link or switch on the device PCB.
Note that the zones on keypads attached to MSNodes do not provide extra zones over and
above the eight zone provided by the MSNode.
The final digit specifies the zone number on the selected device.
Example: 2031 is (reading right to left): zone 1 of device address 03 connected to network 2.
Zones connected to the control panel are numbered 0001 to 0008.
Step 2 – Select Zone Type
The zone type defines how the panel will respond when the zone is triggered. The following
zone types are available:
) By default, a zone is "triggered" by opening the zone contacts. If the zone's Inverted
attribute is set to YES (page 29), the zone triggers when the zone contacts close.
) Copying zone details: Pressing B orr at step 2 copies all properties of the previously
programmed zone.
0 – Not Used
This zone never generates any alarm. It can, however, be used to operate an output
programmed to mimic the zone status; see page 58.
21
Engineer Menu 1-1
Engineering Manual
1 – Normal Alm
The Normal Alm zone generates an alarm (see below) when the system is set. By default, a
full alarm is generated, unless overridden by option 1-8-4 (page 83).
2 – 24 Hour
This zone is monitored at all times. When triggered in the unset condition, an internal
alarm is generated. When triggered in the set condition, a full alarm is generated, unless
overridden by option 1-8-4 (page 83).
Full, Local and Internal Alarms
A full alarm causes keypad sounders, the extension loudspeaker, external sounders, strobe
and communications to operate.
A local alarm causes keypad sounders, the extension loudspeaker, external sounders and
strobe to operate.
An internal alarm causes only keypad sounders and the extension loudspeaker to operate.
Note: Only keypads and extension loudspeakers assigned to the ward that is in alarm will
sound. The extension loudspeaker is assigned to wards using the Panel Speaker attribute
(page 36). Keypads are assigned to wards using option 1-3-1 (page 34).
The external sounder and strobe can be disabled using the Bell & Strobe ward attribute (p 37).
The alarm response can be overridden when a ward group is set by using option 1-8-4 (p 83).
22
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-1
3 – PA Silent
This zone is monitored at all times. When triggered, it can activate outputs that follow the
Panic Alarm (page 44) or P.A. Alarm (page 54) event, but it does not cause an audible
alarm. It cannot be used to generate confirmed alarms (page 89).
4 – PA Audible
This is the same as the PA Silent zone type, but also generates a full alarm.
5 – Fire
A Fire zone is normally connected to a smoke detector that is monitored at all times.
When triggered, it generates a fire tone at keypads and at the panel's extension
loudspeaker (if fitted). It also activates the strobe and pulses the external bell output for
the Bell Duration time (page 61), providing it is not disabled by the Bell & Strobe attribute
(page 37).
See also the Unset Fire ward attribute (page 37) and Latching Fire configuration setting
(page 86).
6 – Technical
This zone is monitored at all times. When an event triggers the zone, the control unit
activates any outputs of type Technical (page 45) and sounds an alert tone at the keypads.
The user can reset the alert by entering their access code at a keypad.
7 – Final Exit
A Final Exit zone must be the first detector or door contact that is triggered when entering
the protected area. Once set, triggering this zone starts the ward Entry Delay timer (page
61).
)
While the Entry Delay timer is running, any Entry zone (page 24), or any zone that
has the Access attribute (page 28) set to YES does not cause an alarm.
)
The Entry Delay timer can also be started if the system is part set by triggering a
Normal Alm zone that has the Entry attribute (page 29) set to YES.
)
You may want to set the Access attribute for a Final Exit zone to YES to prevent the
keypad sounder from making a "zone in fault triggered" tone when the detector is
triggered.
If the setting mode is Final Exit or Exit Terminate (page 76), triggering the zone when
exiting the protected area affects when the panel sets the ward.
8 – Exit Term
An Exit Terminator zone is normally connected to a push button outside the protected
area, and is used as a positive confirmation that setting of the associated wards is
required. Depending on the setting mode (page 76), triggering an exit terminator may be
required before the panel can set the associated wards, or triggering exit terminator may
shorten the period for the wards to set.
An exit terminator zone type is not relevant for the entry procedure.
23
Engineer Menu 1-1
)
Engineering Manual
An Exit Terminator zone can be used as a door bell if one of the Chime Tone zone
attribute (page 29) is applied.
9 – Entry
During the entry time, the control unit ignores any activation of zones with this type.
When used in conjunction with with Ward Attributes 1-3-2 option 16 (see page 38)
the control unit treats any zone programmed as type Entry as a Final Exit zone type when
the ward is set. For example, if the installer uses 1-3-2 option 16 to make ward 2
Entry=F/E, then when a user sets ward 2 any Entry zone type in that ward will be
immediately considered as a Final Exit zone type.
Typically, this option is used in domestic applications for a hall PIR that is used for two
wards, e.g. ward 1 (set when leaving the building) and ward 2 (set when going to bed). If
ward 2 (but not ward 1) is included in Entry=F/E, the hall zone is used as a Final Exit zone
type when setting ward 2.
) The remaining options are available only by scrolling.
Keyswitch
A Keyswitch zone is normally connected to a shunt-lock or keyswitch, which can be used
to set or unset assigned wards.
Assuming the zone's Inverted attribute is set to the default of NO (page 29), if a ward is
currently unset, opening the zone contacts starts the process of setting the ward.
If a latching switch is used, the zone contacts must remain open until the ward is set,
otherwise the setting procedure is cancelled. Once set, the ward can be unset in the
normal manner from a keypad or by closing the zone contacts.
Note: If a user employs a keypad to unset a ward that was set by a latching keyswitch,
then the keyswitch will be at the wrong position to set the ward again. The user must
return the keyswitch to “unset” before attempting to set the system.
If a non-latching switch is used, set the Non Latching zone attribute (page 30) to YES. The
first operation of the switch sets the ward, and the next unsets the ward.
Shunt Key
A Shunt Key zone is normally connected to a shunt-lock or keyswitch that is monitored at
all times. While the key is turned and the zone contacts are in the triggered position (i.e.
by default open), the panel shunts (i.e. isolates) all zones that have the Shuntable attribute
(page 29) set to YES and belong to a ward assigned to the Shunt Key zone. Any type of
zone can be shunted.
If you do not assign any wards to the Shunt Key zone, opening the zone contacts shunts
all zones that have the Shuntable attribute set to YES and are directly connected to the
same device as the Shunt Key. For example, if the shunt key is connected to an MSNode,
the system shunts all shuntable zones connected to the same MSNode. Similarly, if the
shunt key is connected directly to the panel, the system shunts all shuntable zones directly
connected to the panel. Note: A Shunt Key zone cannot itself be set with the Shuntable
attribute.
24
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-1
If a non-latching switch is used, set the Non Latching zone attribute (page 30) to YES. The
first operation of the switch shunts the zones, and the next removes the shunt.
Tamper
A Tamper zone is monitored at all times and is used to monitor the tamper status of
external equipment. When triggered in the set condition, a full alarm is generated, unless
overridden by option 1-8-4 (page 83).
This zone type can be used for a negative tamper return for monitoring SABs, etc. When
using type of monitoring, the zone input is a normally-negative signal (rather than a
normally-closed contact across the zone terminals), and therefore the zone MUST have the
Inverted attribute (page 29) set to YES.
Perimeter
When an event triggers a perimeter zone, the control unit immediately activates all
outputs with the “perimeter” type (see page 56). A perimeter zone is set when its
associated ward(s) is set, and ignored when its associated ward(s) is unset. A perimeter
type zone does NOT cause outputs that follow the Alarm event (pages 44, 54 and 58) to
activate.
Triggering a Perimeter zone is not counted when the panel determines whether there is a
confirmed alarm (page 89). Perimeter zones are usually connected to outside detectors,
which have a higher probability of being accidentally triggered.
Lock Set
Use this zone type if you want a ward's Final Exit zone to be considered as a Normal Alm
zone while the exit door is locked. To use this zone type, the Setting Mode must be set to
Lock Set (page 77), and a Final Exit zone must be in the same ward as the Lock Set zone.
The zone should be connected to a lock switch.
To set the system, the user first enters his/her user code at a keypad or operates a
keyswitch connected to a Keyswitch zone. The control unit starts the exit tone (the exit
time is infinite for this mode). The user then operates the Final Exit zone and turns the key
in the lock switch to “locked”. The system sets seven seconds after the lock switch contacts
open.
While the lock switch is locked, the final exit zone operates as a Normal Alm zone.
To unset the system the user turns the lock switch to “unlocked” (closing the lock switch
contacts). The keypads start a continuous tone. At this point the user can lock the
lockswitch again without causing any alarm. When the user triggers the Final Exit zone, the
control unit starts the Entry Delay timer (page 61). The user completes entry by unsetting
the system in the normal way.
Note that when the user unlocks the lockswitch, the control unit cannot generate
confirmed alarms (page 89), since an authorised presence in the building is assumed. The
control unit can generate confirmed alarms if the user locks the lockswitch without
starting the Entry Delay timer.
)
Note: Use only one Lock Set zone per ward.
25
Engineer Menu 1-1
Engineering Manual
PSU Battery
A PSU Battery zone can connect to a monitored power supply to monitor the output
voltage of the standby battery in the external power supply unit. If the zone triggers,
keypads sound a tone every minute and the panel generates a "PSU Battery" alert
message (displayed when a user enters a valid user code). Any outputs programmed as
type PSU - Battery (page 48 and 56) or Battery Fault (page 48) also activate.
PSU Fuse
A PSU Fuse zone can connect to a monitored power supply unit which uses relays to
signal the condition of a fuse in the external power supply unit. If the zone triggers, the
keypad sounds a tone every minute and the panel generates a "PSU Fuse Blown" alert
message (displayed when a user enters a valid user code). Any outputs programmed as
type PSU - Fuse (page 48 and 56) also activate.
PSU Power
A PSU Power zone can connect to a monitored power supply unit which can monitor the
output voltage of the external power supply unit. If the zone triggers, the keypad sounds a
tone every minute and the panel generates a "PSU Power Supply" alert message
(displayed when a user enters a valid user code). Any outputs programmed as type PSU Power (page 48) or PSU Mains (page 57) also activate.
Masking
Masking indicates that a sensor is being obscured by boxes or other objects.
If a single three-resistor zone is used to communicate alarm, tamper and masking status,
use a standard zone type (e.g. Normal Alm), with the Masking attribute set (page 29). The
Installation Instructions describe how to connect such a sensor and the resistance values
needed to indicate each status.
Alternatively, two zones can be used: one for the masking status and the other for
alarm/tamper status. In this case, the sensor's masking contacts must connect to a zone
programmed as type "Masking", and the alarm/tamper contacts must connect to a
standard zone type. Double-pole (CCL) or FSL wiring can be used for either zone.
Masking can activate mask outputs, depending on whether the zone is set or unset and
the Mask configuration options (see page 93). Also, masking may or may not inhibit users
from setting the affected ward, depending on whether the Mask Override or Mask Inhibit
configuration option is selected (page 93).
)
A masking zone, or a standard zone with a masking status, must remain active for
the duration of the Anti Mask timer (page 63) for a masking alert or masking
output to activate.
Occupancy
This zone type enables the control unit to display a warning message at the keypad if a
user sets a ward that may still be occupied by other people.
A zone of this type is normally connected to an "occupancy" output (open/closed contact)
of an access-control system. When the contact is opened, this indicates that the ward(s)
26
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-1
associated with the zone are occupied. When the contact is closed, this indicates that the
wards are not occupied.
If a ward is occupied when a user attempts to sets the ward, a warning message is
displayed, but the user can override the message and continue with the setting procedure.
Possible applications for this zone type are in controlled access areas where each occupant
must sign in and out using an access control system.
Security
A Security zone type is monitored at all times and can be used to lock-out all keypads in
wards associated with the zone (page 34). The keypads cannot be used while the zone
contacts are in the triggered position (i.e. by default open).
If a non-latching switch is used, set the Non Latching zone attribute (page 30) to YES. The
first operation of the switch disables the keypads, and the next enables the keypads.
Note: The control unit does not lock out the keypad during entry times, regardless of the state of
the security zone input.
Shock Entry
When fitted and programmed correctly, the Shock Entry zone type works as follows:
In a normal entry, the user unlocks the final exit door and perhaps bangs the door,
activating the shock sensor. As a result, the control unit starts a 10 second timer
dedicated to the Shock Entry zone.
The user then opens the final exit door and the Final Exit zone door contact opens,
starting the Entry timer. The control unit suspends the Shock Entry timer.
The user disarms the system before the Entry timer expires. The control unit stops all
timers and does not generate an alarm.
During an intrusive entry, the intruder forces the final exit door and breaks its lock,
activating the shock sensor. The control unit starts the Shock Entry timer as before.
The intruder opens the final exit door, opening the door contact. The control unit starts
the Entry timer and suspends the Shock Entry timer.
The Entry timer expires, causing an alarm. This alarm does not contribute to alarm
confirmation (see DD243 6.4.5).
The control unit resumes counting down the Shock Entry timer. At this point the intruder
must trigger two non-entry route detectors in order to start a confirmed alarm. When the
Shock Entry timer reaches zero the control unit counts this as the first non-entry alarm.
The intruder walks through the premises, and triggers another non-entry alarm. This forms
the second alarm that the control requires in order to start a confirmed alarm.
The Shock Entry zone type is not liable to false alarms caused by casual impacts on the
final exit/entry door. If, for example, the postman forces a large parcel through the letter
box, triggering the shock sensor, then the control units starts the Shock Entry timer.
However, when the timer expires, because the Entry timer never started (and so has not
expired) the control unit does not start an alarm.
Note: For correct operation, you must also enable the following in Option 46:
27
Engineer Menu 1-1
Engineering Manual
Confirmation On.
After Entry Yes.
Confirm 2 zones.
Step 3 – Select Attributes
Each zone can have one or more of the following attributes to alter its operation.
1– Access
Normal Alm zones programmed with this attribute are automatically isolated during the
entry or exit procedure to allow a "walk through" route to access the keypad or to exit.
The Entry zone type (page 24) performs the same function.
You may also want to apply this attribute to a Final Exit zone type to prevent the "zone in
fault triggered" tone when exiting.
2 – Double Knock
Zones programmed with this attribute will cause an alarm only if the zone is triggered a
specified number of times within the Double Knock period (page 63), or the zone remains
active for the whole of the Double Knock period.
The number of times the zone needs to be triggered is determined by the Double Knocks
counter (page 65).
3 – Soak Test
This attribute is useful if you want to place a zone under test. The attribute enables you to
find out whether activations of the zone have occurred, without the activations causing
alarms.
After setting the attribute, the zone is isolated for the period specified by the Soak Test
timer (page 63). If the zone is activated during this period, the activation is logged,
outputs of type Soak Test Fail (page 45) are triggered and the user is informed of the zone
failure after entering a user code. The test fail message is cleared only after entering the
Engineer's code.
If at the end of the test period no activations have occurred, the control unit removes the
attribute from the zone.
Note: The control unit resets the soak test time to zero whenever an engineer or installer
logs in or applies power to the control unit.
4– Omittable
Zones with this attribute can be omitted from the setting procedure by using User option
1-2 (see the Manager's Manual). If the Automatic Omits configuration option is selected
(page 85), zones that are active when the system is set are automatically omitted.
5 – Reset
This attribute is normally assigned to a zone that is connected to a vibration or smoke
detector. The zone is not monitored for approximately 12 seconds during the exit
procedure. This allows the sensor to stabilise, and prevents false alarms.
28
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-1
6 – Masking
Use this attribute only if the zone is a three-resistor zone used to detect sensor masking.
Refer to page 26 for further information.
7 – Entry
Zones with this attribute start the Entry Delay timer (page 61) when the system is part set
(i.e. not all wards are set) and respond as normal when full set. This attribute must be
assigned to all zones that are required to start the Entry Delay timer in the part-set
condition.
Note: Do not use this attribute in software version 3.01.xx onwards. Please use an Entry zone
type and refer to Ward Attributes 1-3-2 option 16 (see page 38).
8 – Chime Tone 1
Zones with this attribute will cause the extension loudspeakers (connected to the control
panel) and keypad sounders to generate a single two-tone “chime” sound if chimes are
enabled for the zone's ward in User option 1-5 and the zone is triggered.
Chimes are generated at all keypad sounders and extension. However, using the Sndr Ctl
output type (page 56), you can make keypad sounders produce only those sounds that are
relevant to a specific ward.
If you select the Chime Visible configuration option (page 85), the keypad displays the
zone number when a chime occurs.
Setting this attribute to YES automatically sets Chime Tone 2 and Chime Tone 3 to NO.
The attribute can also be set using User option 2-5.
9 – Chime Tone 2
This is similar to Chime Tone 1, but a double two-tone “chime” sound is generated.
Setting this attribute to YES automatically sets Chime Tone 1 and Chime Tone 3 to NO.
Chime Tone 3
This is similar to Chime Tone 1, but a triple two-tone “chime” sound is generated.
Setting this attribute to YES automatically sets Chime Tone 1 and Chime Tone 2 to NO.
Inverted
By default, a zone is "triggered" by opening the zone contacts. If the zone's Inverted
attribute is set to YES, the zone triggers when the zone contacts close. Apply this attribute
when monitoring normally open devices such as exit terminator buttons or pressure pads.
Shuntable
Zones with this attribute are automatically shunted (Isolated) if:
A user chooses to shunt all zones in a selected ward using User option 1-3 (24 Hour
zones only).
A user code of type Shunt is entered at the keypad (as set up in User option 2-4).
A Shunt Key zone is triggered (page 24).
29
Engineer Menu 1-1
Engineering Manual
Beam Pair
Zones with this attribute cause an alarm only if two or more zones that are in the same
ward and have the Beam Pair attribute trigger within the time specified by the Beam Pair
timer (page 64). This attribute is normally used only for areas protected by an array of
infra-red beams, with each beam connected to a separate zone. Zones that have the Beam
Pair attribute should be the same type (normally Normal Alm or Perimeter).
Monitored
When triggered, a zone with this attribute activates outputs that follow the Monitored O/P
On (page 48) or Monitor (page 55) event.
Non Latching
Select this attribute for a zone of type Keyswitch (page 24), Shunt Key (page 24) or
Security (page 27) if a non-latching switch is used (i.e. a switch where the contacts do not
stay open after the key is operated).
Supervision
This attribute is for use with radio zones. If you wish to enable supervision for a radio zone
then you must set both the supervision warning timer, (option 1-5-2 27, see page 66).
and the supervision failure time (option 1-5-2 28, see page 66) to a figure greater
than 0.
YES – The control unit monitors this zone for supervision (default).
NO – The control unit ignores all supervision problems with this zone.
Note: By default the supervision attribute is set to YES for all zones, including the hardwired
zones. The control unit uses supervision monitoring on radio zones only, not on
hardwired zones.
Activity
This attribute works together with Downloader to aid remote monitoring of individual
zones. When enabled, the control unit sets an internal flag if the zone has been activated
at any time within the last seven unsetting periods. Downloader can display the state of
this flag and a remote engineer can use this information to judge the health of the
detector for that zone. An installer on-site can also view the state of this flag by means of
“View Zones” option 2-1. The display shows an “A” if the zone has been active within
the last seven unset periods.
YES – The control unit monitors this zone for activity.
NO – The control does not monitor this zone for activity (default).
Step 4 – Select Zone's Wards
Each zone can be assigned to one or more wards.
If the Ward configuration option (page 84) is set to ON, Zones assigned to more than one ward
will only be armed when all the wards they are in are set (by default this option is set to OFF).
30
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-1
Step 5 – Enter Zone Description
Each zone can have up to 16 characters of text assigned to it. The zone text is displayed in, for
example, alarm messages displayed at the keypad. Refer to page 151 for details of how to enter
text.
31
Engineer Menu 1-2
Engineering Manual
Option 1-2: Choosing Advanced Zone Options
Eng 1 Menu 2
Zones Advanced
[
1. SELECT ZONE
Location
Zone
Panel Zone 1
0001 Normal Alm
Zone type (set
up in Eng 1-1)
To select zone:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press r to choose zone on next network
(e.g. to change 0001 to 1001), or
Enter zone number (e.g. 0002)
e.g. |
Panel Zone 2
0002 Entry
[
Resistance
4K7 / 2K2
e.g. |
Resistance
1K0 / 1K0
2
[
Set Output Group
Output Group >-e.g. |
Set Output Group
Output Group >01
[
2. SELECT ZONE
RESISTANCE
1
To select zone resistances:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1-4)
Press [ to save changes and continue
3. SELECT ZONE'S
OUTPUT GROUP
To select zone output group:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Enter group number (e.g. 04)
Press [ to save changes and continue
This option enables you to select the resistance values used at the sensor, and to create output
groups.
Step 1 – Select Zone Number
Choose the zone you want to set up by selecting its zone number (see page 21 for further
details).
Step 2 – Select Zone Resistance
Select the resistance values used at the zone sensor. The first value is the alarm shunt resistance,
and the second is the end-of-line resistance. If you are using a zone with masking (page 26),
select 4K7/2K2.
This option is relevant only if the zone sensor is connected using the fully-supervised loop
connection method, as described in the Installation Instructions. If the zone sensor is connected
using closed circuit wiring then leave the option set to 4k7/2k2.
32
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-2
Step 3 – Select Zone's Output Group
This option enables you to create "output groups". For example, assigning the zone to output
group number 01 creates output group 01 and assigns the zone to it. One or more zones can
belong to the same output group.
Output groups can be used in Engineer option 1-4 to allow an output to follow the status of the
zones within the group (see page 43).
Enter "00" to clear the zone from all groups.
33
Engineer Menu 1-3
Engineering Manual
Option 1-3: Assigning Ward Equipment and Attributes
Option 1-3-1: Assigning Equipment to Wards
Eng 1 Menu 3
Ward Options
[
Note: See next section for
Ward Options - Attributes
1. SELECT "EQUIP TO
WARDS" OPTION
Ward Options
1
Equip To Wards
[
2. SELECT DEVICE
Devic e type
Network 1, Devic e 01
Shows wards that device is
in (initially shows all wards)
1,01 Remote
Ward : 12345678
e.g. |
Network 1, Devic e 02
1,02 Remote
Ward : 12345678
To select network device:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Enter zone num ber (e.g. 102)
[
3. SELECT WARDS
By default, the devic e is
in all wards that its zones
have been allocated to
in Engineer menu 1,1. A
dot (".") indic ates that
none of the devic e's
zones are in the ward
1,02 Remote
Ward > 1234....
e.g.
1,02 Remote
Ward > 123*....
[
Press ward number 1 to 8 to toggle
device in ward (ward number shown) or not
in ward ("* " displayed).
Press [ to save changes and c ontinue
Use the Equip To Wards option to assign each keypad, MSNode, MSPSU, MIDNode/IDNode,
MRNode and LEC2 to the appropriate wards. For the device type, choose Remote for a keypad,
MSNode for an MSNode, RNode for an MRNode, or Node for an MIDNode/IDNode, LEC2.
It is important to allocate each device to the correct wards, since this will ensure correct
responses from the system. For example:
If a tamper alarm occurs at a keypad, and the keypad is assigned to ward "n", then internal
sounders operate (and the control unit communicates a “tamper” fault) if ward "n" is unset.
If ward "n" is set, the alarm response is determined by option 1-8-4 (page 83).
If a “Standard Ward” user code is assigned to ward "n" (user option 2-4), the user code will
only be able to set and unset ward "n" from a keypad that is assigned to ward "n".
) The control panel tamper, extension loudspeaker and external bell tamper can be assigned
to wards using the Panel Tamper, Panel Speaker and Bell Tamp attributes (page 36).
) The bell and strobe can be assigned to wards using the Bell & Strobe attribute (page 37).
) Keypads and loudspeakers connected to an MSNode or MSPSU are automatically allocated
to the same wards as the Node. The loudspeaker and keypad sounder follow the wards
assigned to the Node. For example, if an MSNode is assigned to wards 2 and 3, the
loudspeaker and keypad sounder will operate when ward 2 or3 requires an entry, exit or
34
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-3
alarm sounder. Using the Sndr Ctl output type (page 56), you can make keypad sounders
produce only those sounds that are relevant to a specific ward.
) By default, the sounder in keypads connected directly to a network follow the wards
assigned to the extension loudspeaker. For example, if the extension loudspeaker is
assigned to wards 1 and 2, the keypad sounders operate when ward 1 or 2 requires an
entry, exit or alarm sounder. However, using the Sndr Ctl output type (page 56), you can
make keypad sounders produce only those sounds that are relevant to a specific ward.
Option 1-3-2: Defining Ward Attributes
Eng 1 Menu 3
Ward Options
[
1. SELECT "ATTRIBUTES" OPTION
Note: See previous section for
Equip to Wards option
Ward Options
1
Equip To Wards
|
Ward Options
Attributes
2
X
[
2. SELECT ATTRIBUTE TYPE
Shows wards that
attribute applies to
Conf Reset
01
Ward :........
e.g. |
Unconf Reset 02
Ward :........
To select attribute:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press attribute hot key (e.g. 04)
[
Unconf Reset 02
Ward > ****....
e.g.
Unconf Reset 02
Ward > 1***....
[
3. SELECT WARDS ATTRIBUTE
APPLIES TO
Press ward number 1 to 8 to toggle
device in ward (ward number shown) or not
in ward ("* " displayed).
Press [ to save changes and continue
The Attributes option allows you to assign attributes to wards to affect system behaviour. The
following attributes are available:
01 – Conf Reset
If you select this attribute, an engineer or remote reset code must be entered to reset the
system after a confirmed alarm (page 89) has been activated in the selected wards for at
least the period specified by Abort Delay (page 64). If you deselect this option, any user
who has access to the ward can reset the confirmed alarm. See also the Remote Reset
attribute (page 36).
35
Engineer Menu 1-3
Engineering Manual
02 – Unconf Reset
If you select this attribute, an engineer or remote reset code must be entered to reset the
system after an unconfirmed alarm (page 89) has been sounding in the selected wards for
at least the period specified by Abort Delay (page 64). If you deselect this option, any user
whose code is assigned to the ward can reset the unconfirmed alarm. See also the Remote
Reset attribute (page 36).
03 – Tamper Reset
If you select this attribute, an engineer or remote reset code must be entered to reset the
system after a tamper alarm occurs at a zone in the selected wards while the system is
unset. If you deselect this option, any user who has access to the ward can reset the alarm.
See also the Remote Reset attribute (page 36).
04 – Remote Reset
This is relevant only if the Conf reset, Unconf Reset or Tamper Reset attribute is set (see
above). The Remote Reset attribute enables the panel to generate a code when resetting
the system after an alarm in the selected wards. The user contacts an Alarm Receiving
Centre (ARC) with the code, who (if satisfied with the caller's authority) return a one-off
remote reset code, which the user enters to reset the panel. The User's Guide describes
how to enter the remote reset code.
The algorithm used to generate the remote reset code is determined by the Reset Alg
option (page 65). Contact your ARC to obtain the correct algorithm number.
05 – Panel Tamper
The control panel lid tamper can be assigned to any combination of wards. If a panel
tamper occurs, keypads in the same ward will sound (see page 22), and Tamper outputs
associated with the same ward (see page 55) will activate.
See also Tampers as Alarm / Tampers as Tamps (page 91).
06 – Panel Speaker
The control panel speaker can be assigned to any combination of wards. Assigning the
speaker to the correct wards ensures that the sounders operate only when the relevant
ward(s) require a sound (e.g. for an alarm, entry or exit sound).
07 – Aux/Bell Tamp
The auxiliary and bell box tamper input can be assigned to any combination of wards. If a
bell tamper occurs, keypads in the same ward will sound (see page 22), and Tamper
outputs associated with the same ward (see page 55) will activate.
See also Tampers as Alarm / Tampers as Tamps (page 91).
08 – Payment Timer
The payment timer can be assigned to any combination of wards. When the Payment Time
(page 66) expires, the selected wards will require an engineer or remote reset (see the
User's Guide) before the wards can be set.
36
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-3
09 – Re-arms
If you select this attribute, the ward can rearm zones that have been triggered, but which
are now no longer in the alarm state at the end of the Bell Duration time (page 61). The
number of times the zone can rearm is specified by the No. of Rearms timer (page 65).
)
This attribute applies only if Confirmation Off is selected (page 89).
10 – Secure Ward
A Secure ward attempts to stay in a set condition. If the ward is unset, a "Hi Security Zone
Is Unset" alert message is displayed and the Hi Security timer starts (page 66). The timer
restarts each time a detector is triggered in the Secure ward. When the timer expires, the
system attempts to set the ward automatically.
11 – Bell & Strobe
This option allows you to select which wards will trigger the external sounder (bell) and
strobe outputs on the control panel. Refer to the Bell Delay and Bell Duration notes on
page 61.
12 – Foyer Mode
This enables ward 1 to:
Set automatically when all wards selected in the Foyer Mode attribute have been set. For
example if wards 2, 3 and 4 are selected, the system will automatically set ward 1
when the last of these wards is set.
Unset automatically when any one of the selected wards has been unset (with all the
wards being previously set).
Ward 1 is intended to be a foyer area, which needs to set or unset automatically.
)
To prevent the foyer setting before that of the last ward selected for setting, you
should ensure that the exit time of ward 1 (page 60) is greater than that of the
other wards.
)
Do not select ward 1 in the Foyer Mode option.
)
Ward 1 can be configured to set instantly; see page 88.
13 – Unset Fire
This attribute determines whether outputs that follow a Fire Alarm event (page 44 or 54)
activate only when a Fire zone (page 23) is set, or when the zone is either set or unset.
If a ward has this attribute, a fire alarm from the ward will activate the outputs if the ward
is set or unset. If a ward does not have this attribute, a fire alarm from the ward will
activate the outputs only when the ward is set.
14 – Multiply Ack
This option allows you to designate which wards will use the Double Knock counter (page
65).
37
Engineer Menu 1-3
Engineering Manual
15 – Entry Unset
Use this option to specify which wards must first have their entry timer running, or be in
alarm, before being unset, or which wards can be unset directly from a telecommand. If a
ward appears in this list then a user must start the entry timer for the ward (for example by
opening a Final Exit door). By default all wards appear in the list. If a ward does not appear
in the list then a user can unset the ward directly from the telecommand. (See also Option
1-9-1-28.)
16 - Entry = F/E
This causes any zones programmed as type Entry (page 24) to be regarded as a Final Exit
zone type when the ward is set. For example, if ward 2 is selected in the Entry=F/E, when a
user sets ward 2 any Entry zone type in that ward will be immediately considered as a Final
Exit zone type.
Typically, this option is used in domestic applications for a hall PIR that is used for two
wards, e.g. ward 1 (set when leaving the building) and ward 2 (set when going to bed). If
ward 2 (but not ward 1) is included in Entry=F/E, the hall zone is used as a Final Exit zone
type when setting ward 2.
Note Zones programmed as Normal Alm with the Access attribute (page 28) will remain as
walk through zones and are not affected by this option.
38
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-4
Option 1-4: Setting Up Outputs
Eng 1 Menu 4
Outputs
[
Outputs
Panel
Output type
1. SELECT OUTPUT
TYPE
1
e.g. |
Note: See next section for programming
of custom outputs
Outputs
Digi H/Wired
2
X
To select output type:
"Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
"Press hot key (1 to 6)
[
2. SELECT OUTPUT
NUMBER
Top line shows output number. For equipment outputs, an
address of, for example, 2:02:1 indicates network 2, device
02, output 1
Digi H/Wired
Fire Alarm
Shows what output is currently
set to follow
01
To select output number:
"Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
"Press the output number (e.g. 03)
e.g. |
Digi H/Wired 02
Panic Alarm (PA)
[
Output Type
System
3. SELECT WHETHER OUTPUT (OR GATE
FOR A CUSTOM OUTPUT) FOLLOWS
SYSTEM, WARD, ZONE, USER CODE
OR OUTPUT GROUP
1
To select the item the output or gate must follow:
"Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
"Press the hot key (1to 5)
Output Type
System
1
Output Type
Ward
[
2
Output Type
Zone
[
3
Output Type
User
4
Output Type
Group
[
[
[
4. SELECT ITEM THE
OUTPUT/GATE
MUST FOLLOW
Shows the ward that the
output will follow
Select Ward
AlwaysOff
>1
Select Ward
AlwaysOff
Enter Zone:
0001 Normal Alm
e.g. |
e.g. |
>2
[
Enter User No.
000 Code Entered
e.g. |
Enter Zone:
0002 Entry
[
Enter Group No.
Group
01
e.g. |
e.g. |
Ward Type
Outputs
>31
1
Panel2 AlwaysOff
Ward
e.g. 6
|
System Type >007
Fire Alarm
Ward Type
Outputs
>32
6
Custom
Ward
2 SetStrobe
Outputs .
[
y
[
Zone OP Type
0002 Mimic
Enter Group No.
Group
02
[
[
5. SELECT THE EVENT
THAT SHOULD
ACTIVATE THE
OUTPUT/GATE
>1
To select the event:
"Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
"Press hot key
e.g. |
Zone OP Type
0002 Alarm
To select the item that the output
is required to follow:
"Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
"Press the item number
Enter User No.
001 Code Entered
Ward number selected in the
previous screen
System Type >006
Panic Alarm (PA)
5
>2
[
Output Inversion
Output = Normal
If required, press r to toggle
sense of output (Normal or Invert).
6. SELECT THE
INVERSION AND
OUTPUT MODE
[
Output Mode
Output = Latched
If required, press r to toggle
output mode (Latched or Pulsed).
[
39
Engineer Menu 1-4
Engineering Manual
Flowchart for custom outputs:
Eng 1 Menu 4
Outputs
[
1. SELECT OUTPUT TYPE
Outputs
Panel
1
Press 6 for custom outputs. See
previous section for other output types
6
Outputs
6
Custom Outputs
X
[
2. SELECT OUTPUT NUMBER
Custom Output
1
e.g. |
Custom Output
2
To select custom output:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the c ustom output number (e.g. 1)
[
Custom 2-1
Always Off
e.g. |
Custom 2-2
Always Off
3. SELECT WHICH OF EIGHT
GATES OF THE CUSTOM
OUTPUT TO PROGRAM
(OR)
(OR)
To select the gate:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Enter the gate number (1to 8)
[
Output Type
System
1
4. SELECT WHETHER GATE
FOLLOWS SYSTEM, WARD,
ZONE, USER CODE OR
OUTPUT GROUP
Follow from Step 3 in the
flowchart shown in the
previous section
If you are using outputs from the control panel or its network devices, you need to use the
Outputs option to specify the event that should cause the output to activate. For example, if you
select the Fire Alarm event for an output, the output will activate when a Fire zone triggers.
Step 1 – Select Output Type
Select the type of output you want to set up:
1 – Panel
Select this option to set up output 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 on the control panel PCB. Outputs 1 and 2
are relays (voltage-free contacts); outputs 3, 4 and 5 are transistor outputs.
Please refer to the control panel's Installation Instructions for details of how these outputs
operate and their electrical characteristics. Note that the M800 does not have outputs 3
and 5.
40
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-4
2 – Digi H/Wired
Select this option to set up any of the digital communicator outputs on the control panel
PCB.
3 – Digi On Board
Select this option to set up any of the digi on-board "software" outputs, the status of
which can be transmitted via the on-board modem port to an Alarm Receiving Centre
(ARC). Digi On Board programming is relevant only if using the Fast Format (page 110);
other communications formats use the data that is automatically added to the event log.
4 – Equipment
Select this option to set up outputs connected to a keypad, MSNode, MSPSU (or the
obsolete MIDNode/IDNode).
5 – O/M Modules (obsolete)
Select this option to set up outputs connected to an output module (this connects to the
output module port on the control panel's PCB).
6 – Custom Outputs
Custom outputs enable you to choose a combination of different events to trigger an
output. To set up and use custom outputs:
1.
Define the required logic behaviour of the custom output using the flowchart on page
40 and the notes below.
2.
Assign a custom output event (page 51) to the required output. For example, if you
have defined the logic behaviour for custom output 2, assign "Custom O/P 2 On" to
the appropriate output (e.g. a panel output). The output will activate when the correct
combination of events occur, as specified by the required logic behaviour.
Defining the logic behaviour
Each custom output has four logic gates, which you need to program. Gates 1 to 4
perform an OR function, and gates 5 to 8 perform an AND function (Figure 8). The custom
output activates when either of the following occurs:
Any one of the events assigned to gate 1 to 4 occur (logical OR function).
All of the events assigned to gates 5 to 8 occur (logical AND function).
)
When programming a custom output, program any unused OR gates as “Always
Off”. Program unused AND gates as “Always On”.
1
2
3
Input
Custom Output
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 8) Logical operation of Custom Outputs
41
Engineer Menu 1-4
Engineering Manual
Example 1: The gates in custom output 1 have the following default settings. If the
defaults are used, the custom output activates only when the system is full set AND there
is an alarm.
OR
1
2
3
4
GATES
Always Off
Always Off
Always Off
Always Off
AND GATES
5 System Full Set
6 System Full Set
7 Alarm
8 Alarm
Example 2: The gates in custom output 2 have the following default settings. If the
defaults are used, the custom output activates only when the system is full set AND there
is a confirmed alarm.
OR
1
2
3
4
GATES
Always Off
Always Off
Always Off
Always Off
AND GATES
5 System Full Set
6 System Full Set
7 Confirmed
8 Confirmed
Example 3: The following example shows how to program a custom output to enable it to
activate when a monitored power supply reports a "PSU - Power" event AND a selected
ward is set.
OR
1
2
3
4
GATES
Always Off
Always Off
Always Off
Always Off
AND GATES
5 PSU - Power
6 Set (Ward option 08)
7 Set (Ward option 08)
8 Set (Ward option 08)
Step 2 – Select Output Number
Select the output of the chosen type to set up. For example, if you have chosen to set up a
Panel output, select whether to set up output 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
NOTE:
The programmable output available on the keypad PCB is electronically linked to the
lower LED on the display. The LED is active when the output is active. There is a jumper
link “LED mimic” on the keypad pcb that you can remove if you wish the lower LED to
stay dark.
By default the keypad output is programmed as “Pending”. This means that it becomes
active if there are two (or more) alerts pending.
When connected to an MSNode, the keypad output follows one of the two outputs on the
MSNode. To program the function of the keypad output you must program the function of
one or other of the MSNode outputs.
To select which output the keypads will follow:
Give the keypad an even address (2 or 4) to follow output 2.
42
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-4
Give the keypad an odd address (1 or 3) to follow output 1.
Note that the zones on keypads attached to MSNodes do not provide extra zones over
and above the eight zone provided by the MSNode.
Step 3 – Select Which Item the Output Follows
At this stage select the general type of event that should activate the output (you can select
specific types in Step 4):
1– System
The output activates when an event relating to the status of the alarm system in general
occurs.
2 – Ward
The output activates when an event relating to a specific ward occurs.
3 – Zone
The output activates when an event relating to a specific zone occurs.
4 – User
The output activates when a specified user enters their user code. The operation of the
output depends on whether Timed code o/p or Latched code o/p is selected (page 86).
5 – Zone Output Group
The output will follow the status of a specified zone output group (page 33). The output is
activated if any of the zones in the group are triggered.
Step 4 – Select Ward, Zone, User or Zone Output Group Number
If appropriate, select the particular ward, zone, user or zone output group the output should
follow.
Step 5 – Select Event to Activate Output
If you have chosen the output to follow a ward, zone or the system, you need to select the
event that should activate the output.
System Output Types
The following events are applicable if you have chosen the output to follow the system:
000 – Bell (SAB)
Activates when the control panel bell output is on, and deactivates when the control panel
bell output is off. The bell output may be activated on a confirmed or unconfirmed alarm,
depending on whether Bells on Confirm or Bells on Unconf is selected (page 90).
001 – System Strobe
Activates when the control panel strobe output is on; deactivates when the control panel
strobe output is off.
43
Engineer Menu 1-4
Engineering Manual
002 – Switch 12 Volts
Activates when any ward is set; deactivates when any ward goes into alarm or its Entry
Delay timer (page 61) is running, or when all wards are unset. This output is normally used
as an input to latching detectors.
003 – Detector Reset
Deactivates for approximately 4 seconds when a user code is entered to set the first ward.
The output is used to reset latching detectors (smoke detectors, shock sensors, etc.).
004 – Walk Test
Activates when a walk test is carried out (User option 1-1-2; see the Manager's Manual);
deactivates when the walk test is finished.
005 – Alarm
Activates when any ward has a full alarm (page 22); deactivates when all such wards have
been reset.
006 – Panic Alarm (PA)
Activates when any PA Silent or PA Audible zone (page 23) triggers, or if a user code of
type Panic Code is used. The output deactivates when all such alarms have been reset.
007 – Fire Alarm
Activates when any Fire zone (page 23) triggers. The Unset Fire attribute (page 37)
determines whether the output activates only when the zone is set, or when the zone is
either set or unset. The output deactivates when all Fire alarms have been reset.
008 – System Set
Activates when any ward is set; deactivates when all wards are unset.
009 – System Full Set
Activates when all wards are set; deactivates when any ward is unset.
010 – System Open
Activates when the system is unset; deactivates when any part of the system is set.
011 – Confirmed
Activates when there is a confirmed alarm (page 89), and remains active until the system is
reset.
012 – Courtesy Light
Activates for the duration of the Courtesy Time (page 64) when any ward has the Entry
Delay timer (page 61) running, or if any keypad is operated.
013 – Engineer On Site
Activates when the engineer’s code is entered; deactivates when the engineer is logged
off.
44
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-4
014 – Active Omit
If a latching sensor (such as a door contact or break glass, but NOT a PIR) activates a zone,
and the zone remains active until the end of the confirmation time (page 62), the control
panel omits the active zone and triggers the Active Omit output. The control panel
deactivates the output when a user resets the system.
015 – Zones Omitted
Activates when any zone is omitted (e.g. by user option 1-2); deactivates when all zones
have the omits removed.
016 – 24 Hour Omitted
Activates when any 24 Hour zone is manually omitted; deactivates when all omitted zones
are reinstated.
017 – 24 Hour Alarm
Activates when any 24 Hour zone (page 22) goes into the alarm state if the panel is unset,
and deactivates when all 24 Hour alarms have been reset.
018 – Zones Shunted
Activates when any shunt group (page 122) is omitted; deactivates when the shunt group
is reinstated.
019 – Technical
Activates when any Technical zone (see page 23) triggers; deactivates when the alarms
have been reset.
020 – PSTN Line Fault
Activates when a line fault is detected between the on-board modem and the Alarm
Receiving Centre (ARC); deactivates when the telephone line is restored. The Line Fault
communications option (page 119) must be enabled for this output to activate when there
is a line fault.
021 – Panel Mains Power Off
Activates when the mains power is removed from the control panel; deactivates when the
mains power is restored.
)
The AC Off Delay timer (page 63) determines how long the mains must be off
before the output activates.
022 – Access Code
If the Access Code Only configuration option is set (page 87), this output activates when a
user code of type Access is entered. If the Access All Codes configuration is set (page 87),
this output activates when any valid user code is entered. The output deactivates one
second later if the output is latched, or for the length of the pulse if the output is pulsed.
023 – Soak Test Fail
Activates when any zone undergoing a "soak test" (page 28) triggers; deactivates when
reset by the engineer.
45
Engineer Menu 1-4
Engineering Manual
024 – First Knock
Activates when any double knock zone (page 28) activates for the first time; deactivates
when the zone is activated for the second time, when the system is reset or when the
double-knock timer has expired (page 63).
025 – Digi Failed
Activates when the built-in modem fails to communicate. This is otherwise known as
"Comms Fail".
026 – Digi Successful
Activates when the built-in modem communicates successfully.
027 – Digi Active
Activates when the built-in modem is activated; deactivates when the built-in modem has
finished communicating.
028 – 2nd Entry Only
Activates when any ward starts the 2nd Entry Dly timer (page 63); deactivates when the
second entry time expires.
029 – Entry Only
Activates when any ward starts its Entry Delay timer (page 61); deactivates when the ward
is unset or when the Entry Delay timer expires.
030 – Exit Only
Activates when any ward starts the exit procedure; deactivates when the ward is set.
031 – Exit / Entry
Activates when any ward is in entry or exit mode.
032 – Exit Fault
Activates when a zone is in a fault condition during the setting procedure (e.g. a zone that
does not have the Access attribute is activated); deactivates when the fault is no longer
present.
033 – Tamper Alarm
Activates when any type of tamper condition is triggered; deactivates when all tamper
conditions have been reset. This output acts as a "global" tamper indication for any type
of tamper.
034 – Rem Service Call
Activates when the system is online with a remote PC and the Downloader software.
035 – Code Accepted
Activates after any valid user code has been entered. The output deactivates one second
later if the output is latched, or for the length of the pulse if the output is pulsed.
46
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-4
036 – Service Required
Activates when the Service Time (page 64) has expired; deactivates when the engineer
code is entered.
037 – Reset Required
Activates when the system requires an engineer or remote reset; deactivates when the
system is reset either by the engineer or by a remote reset.
038 – Strobe On Set
Activates when there is an alarm, and deactivates when the alarm is reset by the user. This
output is also active for 10 seconds after a user sets the system.
039 – Duress Alarm
Activates when a duress code is entered (as set up in User option 2-4); deactivates when
the duress alarm is reset.
040 – System Part Set
Activates when not all wards are set; deactivates when all wards are set or unset.
041 – LockSet Unlocked
Active when a Lock Set zone (page 25) is unlocked; deactivates when all Lock Set zones on
the system are locked.
042 – Set Failed
Activates when any ward fails to set (e.g. because a zone is active); deactivates when the
set fail condition is reset.
043 – Shunt Code
If the output is latched, the output activates for 2 seconds when a shunt code (as set up in
User option 2-4) is entered. If the output is pulsed, it activates for the duration of the
pulse.
044 – Random Output On
Activates randomly (between 5 and 60 minutes).
045 – Modem Lockout
Activates when the modem is locked-out (four failed attempts); deactivates when a
Manager user code is entered or after 4 hours.
046 – Aux/Bell Tamper
Activates when the bell tamper is triggered; deactivates when the alarm is reset.
047 – Panel Lid Tamper
Activates when the panel lid tamper is activated; deactivates when the alarm is reset.
048 – Chime Mimic
Activates for 2 seconds when any zone with a Chime Tone attribute (page 29) is activated,
if chimes are enabled in User option 1-5.
47
Engineer Menu 1-4
Engineering Manual
049 – Monitored O/P On
If the output is latched, the output activates when a zone that has the Monitored attribute
(page 30) is activated and deactivates when the zone deactivates. If the output is pulsed, it
activates when a zone that has the Monitored attribute activates and remains active for
the pulse duration.
050 – Alarm Abort
Activates after an alarm has been aborted by the user; deactivates when the Abort Period
timer (page 63) has expired, or when the alarm is reset (whichever occurs first).
051 – Rem Call Enabled
Not used.
052 – Relearn Required
Activates when the system needs an engineer to confirm the devices attached to the
panel's network ports (e.g. after a new device is attached); deactivates when the relearn
has been performed.
053 – Always On
Active at all times.
054 – Always Off
This output never activates.
055 – Battery Test On
Activates during a battery test. The test starts when an engineer logs out, and lasts for
approximately 10 seconds. If required, the output can be used by the battery test input of
a monitored power supply.
056 – Battery Fault
Activates when the backup battery in the panel is not charging or has a low voltage.
057 – PSU - Battery
Activates while a PSU Battery zone (page 26) is active.
058 – PSU - Fuse
Activates while a PSU Fuse zone (page 26) is active.
059 – PSU - Power
Activates while a PSU Power zone (page 26) is active.
060 – General Fault
Activates when there is a general fault. A general fault occurs if one of the following
occurs.
Panel mains fail
Panel Battery Fault
Remote PSU mains fail
Remote PSU Battery Fault
Mains fail panel/MSPSU
Battery Fail panel/remote PSU
PSU Battery zone (page 26) active
Remote PSU power out fail
PSU Fuse zone (page 26) active
Panel Aux fuse fail
48
Engineering Manual
PSU Power zone (page 26) active
Masking
ID Loop Short
Fault 4k4
Supervision fail
Transmitter battery low
External Line fail (page 49)
Engineer Menu 1-4
Panel Bell fuse fail
Network fuse fail
Digi Failed (page 46)
PSTN Line fail
Jamming
Telecommand battery low
061 – Mask Tamper
This is applicable only if the Mask Unset Tamp or Mask Set Tamper option is selected
(page 93). The output activates when a masking condition has been detected (see page
26) and clears when the alarm is reset. The Anti Mask timer (page 63) delays activation of
the output.
062 – Mask Fault
This is applicable only if the Mask Unset Fault or Mask Set Fault option is selected (page
93). The output activates when a masking condition has been detected (see page 26) and
clears when the alarm is reset. The Anti Mask timer (page 63) delays activation of the
output.
63 – Mask Alarm
The control unit operates this output when a suitably equipped detector reports masking.
64 – 4k4 Fault Output
The control unit operates this output when a suitably equipped detector reports a self test
failure by triggering a resistance value of 4k4 ohms.
065 – Pending
Activates when more than one alert condition needs to be reset.
066 – Always Off
067 – Ext. Line Fault
Activates when there is +12Vdc at the LINE FLT input on the control panel.
068 – ATS Test
This output type is available for Panel and Digi H/Wired outputs and should be used only
for connection to the ATS Test input of a dual-path communicator, such as a RedCARE
Subscribed Terminal Unit (STU). A dual-path communicator can communicate with an ARC
using a landline, or if this is not available, through a GSM (mobile) connection.
The Line Fault output of the communicator must connect to the LINE FLT input of the
panel and must be able to provide +12Vdc. For example, if the Line Fault output at the
communicator uses a relay, connect the common terminal of the relay to +12Vdc and the
normally-open terminal to the LINE FLT input of the panel.
The ATS Test output pulses when +12Vdc is first applied to the LINE FLT input. This
requests the communicator to signal, by pulsing the LINE FLT input, whether both or only
one of the communicator's networks are in a line fault condition. The panel generates an
"ATE L.F. Single" alert if only one of the networks is not available, or "ATE L.F. All" if both
49
Engineer Menu 1-4
Engineering Manual
networks are not available. If a single-path communicator is used (which does not require
the ATS Test output from the panel), applying a constant +12Vdc to the LINE FLT input of
the panel generates an "ATE L.F. All" alert.
)
Invert the sense of the output at the panel if a "positive applied" input sense is
used at the communicator. The Normal/Pulsed output mode (page 59) is not used
for the ATS Test output type.
069 – Ready to Set
This output is intended for connection to a card or prox tag reader installed outside the
protected area. The output can be used to drive a “Ready to Set” led so that a user can see
the state of the system before attempting to arm it. The output is active when there are no
resets pending, all wards have all their zones closed, and no wards are set already.
070 – Auxiliary Fuse
Activates when the panel's auxiliary 12V fuse is blown.
If you want to use this event for a output that is powered by the panel, the output must be
configured so that its normal state is "on" to indicate the presence of power, and "off"
means power is off. If you are using a switched-negative digital communicator output, this
means that the sense of the output must be inverted. Note that the communicator must
be powered from a different source for the power failure to be communicated.
071 – Bell Fuse
Activates when the polyfuse protecting the bell output fuses.
072 – Network 1 Fuse
Activates when the polyfuse protecting the Network 1 output fuses. Do not use this event
for outputs connected to any device on network 1.
073 – Network 2 Fuse
Activates when the polyfuse protecting the Network 2 output fuses. Do not use this event
for outputs connected to any device on network 2.
074 to 079 – Always Off
This output never activates.
080 – Rem Batt Fault
This activates when there is battery fault at any MSPSU.
081 – Rem Mains Off
This activates when mains power switches off at any MSPSU.
082 – Rem Pwr Out Flt
This activates when the voltage from any MSPSU power supply is too high or too low. This
may indicate excessive loading (voltage too low).
083 – Sys Batt Fault
This activates when there is a fault with the battery in the control panel or any MSPSU.
50
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-4
084 – Sys Mains Fault
This activates when mains power switches off at the control panel or in any MSPSU.
085 to 099 – Always Off
This output never activates.
100 – Auto-Setting
Activates for 1 minute prior to any ward being set automatically by an auto-set timer
(page 70). Note that if the user defers setting then the output remains on for the duration
of the deferred set period.
101 to 108 – Always Off
These outputs never activate.
109 – PC Output 1 On
This output is controlled by a PC running the Downloader software.
110 – PC Output 2 On
This output is controlled by a PC running the Downloader software.
111 – PC Output 3 On
This output is controlled by a PC running the Downloader software.
112 – PC Output 4 On
This output is controlled by a PC running the Downloader software.
113 to 118 – Always Off
This output never activates.
119 – Custom O/P 1 On
Activates when custom output 1 (page 41) activates.
120 – Custom O/P 2 On
Activates when custom output 2 (page 41) activates.
121 – Custom O/P 3 On
Activates when custom output 3 (page 41) activates.
122 – Custom O/P 4 On
Activates when custom output 4 (page 41) activates.
123 – Custom O/P 5 On
Activates when custom output 5 (page 41) activates.
124 – Custom O/P 6 On
Activates when custom output 6 (page 41) activates.
125 – Custom O/P 7 On
Activates when custom output 7 (page 41) activates.
51
Engineer Menu 1-4
Engineering Manual
126 – Custom O/P 8 On
Activates when custom output 8 (page 41) activates.
127 to 128 – Always Off
This output never activates.
129 – Time Switch 1 On
Activates while time switch 1 (page 66) is active.
130 – Time Switch 2 On
Activates while time switch 2 (page 66) is active.
131 – Time Switch 3 On
Activates while time switch 3 (page 66) is active.
132 – Time Switch 4 On
Activates while time switch 4 (page 66) is active.
133 – Time Switch 5 On
Activates while time switch 5 (page 66) is active.
134 – Time Switch 6 On (not M800)
Activates while time switch 6 (page 66) is active.
135 – Time Switch 7 On (not M800)
Activates while time switch 7 (page 66) is active.
136 – Time Switch 8 On (not M800)
Activates while time switch 8 (page 66) is active.
137 – Time Switch 9 On (not M800)
Activates while time switch 9 (page 66) is active.
138 – Time Switch 10 On (not M800)
Activates while time switch 10 (page 66) is active.
139 to 148 – Always Off
These outputs never activate.
149 – Supervision Fail
This output operates when there is a supervision failure on any radio zone. The output
remains on until the alert is reset. See also option 1-9-3-17.
The control unit operates the General Fault System Output at the same time as the
Supervision Failed System Output.
150 – RF Jammed
The control unit operates this output when any MRNode reports jamming. The output
remains on until all jammed MRNodes report no jamming.
52
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-4
The control unit operates the General Fault System Output at the same time as the RF
Jammed System Output.
151 – Tx Low Battery
The control unit operates this output when any MRNode reports a wirefree detector with
low battery. (There is a separate output type for Telecommands and PAs.) The output
remains on until all MRNodes stop reporting detectors with low batteries.
The control unit operates the General Fault System Output at the same time as the TX Low
Battery System Output.
152 – Telecommand Low Battery
The control unit operates this output when any MRNode reports a telecommand or PA
with low battery. The output remains on until all MRNodes stop reporting telecommands
or PAs with low batteries.
The control unit operates the General Fault System Output at the same time as the
Telecommand Low Battery System Output.
153 – Set Pulse
The control unit switches this output on for 10 seconds when a user sets any ward.
154 – Unset Pulse
The control unit switches this output on for 10 seconds when a user unsets any ward.
Ward Event Output Types
The following events are applicable if you have chosen the output to follow a specific ward:
00 – Bell-SAB
Activates when the selected ward is in alarm and the control panel bell output is on, and
deactivates when the bell output is off. The bell output may be activated on a confirmed
or unconfirmed alarm, depending on whether Bells on Confirm or Bells on Unconf is
selected (page 90).
01 – Strobe
Activates when the selected ward is in alarm and the control panel strobe output is on;
deactivates when the selected ward is reset.
02 – Switch 12
Activates when the selected ward is set; deactivates when the selected ward is in alarm, its
Entry Delay timer (page 61) is running or the ward is unset. This output is normally used as
an input to latching detectors.
03 – Det. Reset
Deactivates for approximately 4 seconds when a user code is entered to set the first ward.
The output is used to reset latching detectors (smoke detectors, shock sensors, etc.).
04 – Walk Test
Activates when the selected ward is walk tested (User option 1-1-2); deactivates when the
walk test is exited.
53
Engineer Menu 1-4
Engineering Manual
05 – Alarm
Activates when the selected ward has a full alarm (page 22); deactivates when the alarm
has been reset.
06 – P.A. Alarm
Activates when a PA Silent or PA Audible zone (page 23) triggers, or if a user code of type
Panic Code is used. The output activates only if the zone or user code belongs to the
selected ward. The output deactivates when all such alarms applicable to the ward have
been reset.
07 – Fire Alm.
Activates when any Fire zone (see page 23) that is in the selected ward triggers. The Unset
Fire attribute (page 37) determines whether the output activates only when the zone is set,
or when the zone is either set or unset. The output deactivates when all Fire alarms in
zones associated with the ward have been reset.
08 – Set
Activates when the selected ward is set; deactivates when the selected ward is unset.
09 – 2nd Entry
Activates when the selected ward's 2nd Entry Dly timer is running (page 63).
10 – 24Hr Alm.
Activates when a 24 Hour zone (page 22) in the selected ward goes into the alarm state if
the panel is unset; deactivates when the alarm is reset.
11 – Cnf Alarm
Activates when a confirmed alarm (page 89) is detected by a zone in the selected ward,
and remains active until reset.
12 – Zone Omit
Activates when any zone in the selected ward is omitted or shunted (e.g. by user option 12 or 1-3); deactivates when all zones in the selected ward have the omits/shunts removed.
13 – Act. Omit
If a latching sensor (such as a door contact or break glass, but NOT a PIR) activates a zone
in the selected ward, and the zone remains active until the end of the confirmation time
(page 62), the control panel omits the active zone and triggers the Active Omit output.
The control panel deactivates the output when a user resets the system.
14 – 24Hr Omit
Activates when the selected ward has one or more 24 Hour zones omitted; deactivates
when the selected ward has all its 24 Hour zones reinstated.
15 – Set Fail
Activates when the selected ward fails to set (e.g. because a zone is active); deactivates
when the selected ward is reset.
54
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-4
16 – Settling
Activates when the Exit Settle timer (page 63) is running for the selected ward.
17 – Clear
Activates when the selected ward has no tamper conditions and no zones activated. The
output deactivates when the selected ward has a tamper or zone activation.
18 – Tamper
Activates when any type of tamper condition is triggered in the selected ward; deactivates
when all tamper conditions have been reset in the ward. This output acts as a "global"
tamper indication for any type of tamper associated with the ward.
19 – Reset Req
Activates when the selected ward requires an engineer or remote reset; deactivates when
the ward has been reset either by the engineer or by a remote reset.
20 – Lock-Out
Activates when a security key (page 27) has locked out keypads in the selected ward;
deactivates when the Security zone type is no longer active.
21 – Chime On
Activates when any zone in the selected ward causes a chime tone, as determined by the
Chime Tone attribute (page 29).
22 – Monitor
If the output is latched, the output activates when a zone that has the Monitored attribute
(page 30) and is in the selected ward activates, and deactivates when the zone deactivates.
If the output is pulsed, it activates when a zone that has the Monitored attribute and is in
the selected ward activates, and remains active for the pulse duration.
23 – Alm Abort
Activates after an alarm in the selected ward has been aborted by the user; deactivates
when the Abort Period timer (page 63) has expired, or when the alarm is reset (whichever
occurs first).
24 – Entry
Activates when the Entry Delay timer (page 61) is running for the selected ward;
deactivates when the selected ward is unset or when the Entry Delay timer expires.
25 – Exit
Activates when the selected ward starts the exit procedure; deactivates when the selected
ward is set.
26 – Exit/Ent.
Activates when the selected ward is in entry or exit mode.
55
Engineer Menu 1-4
Engineering Manual
27 – Exit Flt
Activates when a zone in the selected ward is in a fault condition during the setting
procedure (e.g. a zone that does not have the Access attribute is activated); deactivates
when the fault is no longer present.
28 – Sndr Ctl.
Activates when a sound is required at a keypad assigned to the selected ward. For
example, for the Entry Delay or Exit timer (page 60) or an alarm condition.
By default, if a keypad is connected to an MSNode or MSPSU, it produces sounds for any
ward assigned to the Node (page 34). Keypads connected directly to the network produce
sounds for any ward assigned to the panel's extension loudspeaker (page 35). This output
type is used to ensure that a keypad produces sounds only for the ward selected for the
output.
To use this feature, assign the Sndr Ctl output type to the output of the relevant keypad
and fit the jumper across the "WARD SNDR" link in the keypad (see the Keypad Installation
Instructions). Assign the Node/loudspeaker to all used wards. The keypad sounder will
operate only when the output is switched on, i.e. when a sound is required for the
specified ward.
29 – Perimeter
Activates when the selected ward has a Perimeter zone (page 25) in alarm; deactivates
when the alarm is reset.
30 – Shunted
Activates when the selected ward has one or more zone shunted (by User option 1-3);
deactivates when the zones are reinstated.
31 – AlwaysOff
Never activates.
32 – SetStrobe
Activates when there is an alarm in the selected ward, and deactivates when a user resets
the alarm. The control panel also activates this output for 10 seconds after a user sets the
ward.
33 – Access
If the Access Code Only configuration option is set (page 87), this output activates when a
user code of type Access assigned to the selected ward is entered. If the Access All Codes
option is set (page 87), this output activates when any valid user code assigned to the
selected ward is entered. The output deactivates one second later if the output is latched,
or for the length of the pulse if the output is pulsed.
34 – LS Open
Active when a Lock Set zone (page 25) in the selected ward is unlocked.
35 – PSU Batt
Activates while a PSU Battery zone (page 26) in the selected ward is active.
56
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-4
36 – PSU Fuse
Activates while a PSU Fuse zone (page 26) in the selected ward is active.
37 – PSU Mains
Activates while a PSU Power zone (page 26) in the selected ward is active.
38 – Mask Tamp
This is applicable only if the Mask Unset Tamp or Mask Set Tamper option is selected
(page 93). The output activates when a masking condition has been detected in the
selected ward (see page 26). The Anti Mask timer (page 63) delays activation of the
output.
39 – Mask Flt
This is applicable only if the Mask Unset Fault or Mask Set Fault option is selected (page
93). The output activates when a masking condition has been detected in the selected
ward (see page 26). The Anti Mask timer (page 63) delays activation of the output.
40 – Mask Alarm
The control unit operates this output when a suitably equipped detector reports masking
in its associated ward.
41 – Security
Activates when the selected Secure ward (page 37) is unset; deactivates when the Secure
ward is set.
42 – Supervision Fail
This output operates when there is a supervision failure on any radio zone allocated to the
ward programmed for this output. The output remains on until all supervision failures for
the ward are reset (see also option 1-9-3 17).
Note that to give a reliable indication of the location of the fault, you must assign each
MRNode to the appropriate ward (option 1-3-1), and each radio zone to the
appropriate ward (option 1-1).
43 – RF Jammed
The control unit operates this output when any MRNode reports jamming. The output
remains on until all jammed MRNodes report no jamming.
44 – Transmitter Low Battery
The control unit operates this output when any MRNode reports a wirefree detector with
low battery. (There is a separate output type for Telecommands and PAs.) The output
remains on until all MRNodes stop reporting detectors with low batteries.
45 – Telecommand Battery Low
The control unit operates this output when any MRNode reports a telecommand or PA
with low battery. The output remains on until all MRNodes stop reporting telecommands
or PAs with low batteries.
57
Engineer Menu 1-4
Engineering Manual
46 – Set Pulse
The control unit switches this output on for 10 seconds when a user sets any ward.
47 – Unset Pulse
The control unit switches this output on for 10 seconds when a user unsets any ward.
48 – 4k4 Fault
The control unit operates this output when a suitably equipped detector allocated to the
ward reports a self test failure by triggering a resistance value of 4k4 ohms.
49 – Ward (n) Ready Set
This output is intended for connection to a card or prox tag reader installed outside the
protected area. The output can be used to drive a “Ready to Set” led so that a user can see
the state of the ward before attempting to arm it. The control unit operates this output
when all the zones assigned to the selected ward are inactive (closed). If any zone opens,
then the control unit deactivates the output.
Zone Event Output Types
The following events are applicable if you have chosen the output to follow a specific zone:
1 – Mimic
Activates when the selected zone is active; deactivates when the selected zone is not
active. The output can follow any zone, including those that are "Not used".
Depending on whether Mimic, All Times or Mimic Set Only is selected (page 87), the
output may mimic the zone only if the zone is in a set ward.
2 – Alarm
Activates when the selected zone causes a full, local or internal alarm (page 22);
deactivates when the alarm has been reset.
3 – Tamper
Activates when the selected zone is in tamper (irrespective of whether the zone's ward is
set); deactivates when tamper is reset.
4 – Test Fail
Activates when the selected zone is triggered while on soak test (page 28); deactivates
when the engineer enters the engineer code.
5 – Omit
Activates when the selected zone is omitted or shunted (User option 1-2 or 1-3);
deactivates when the selected zone has the omit/shunt removed.
User Events
Use this option to activate an output whenever a specific user keys in their access code (see
page 39 for instructions).
58
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-4
Zone Output Group Events
Use this option to activate an output whenever a user operates a zone output group (see pages
33 and 39 for instructions).
Step 6 – Select the Inversion and Output Mode
Output Inversion
Selecting this option inverts the sense of the output.
Output Mode
) Output Mode is not available for certain outputs types.
The normal mode is Latched.
Selecting Pulsed causes the output always to return to its normal state after the specified
number of seconds. This can result in the output returning to the normal state sooner than if
the Latched mode is selected.
59
Engineer Menu 1-5
Engineering Manual
Option 1-5: Setting Up Timers
Option 1-5-1: Setting Up Ward Timers
Eng
1 Menu 5
1234567890123456
Timers
1234567890123456
[
1. SELECTWARD
"
TIMERS" OPTION
Timers
1
1234567890123456
Ward
Timers
1234567890123456
[
2. SELECT TIMER TY
Ward Timers
Exit
1
e.g. |
Timer type
Ward Timers
Entry
2
To select the timer typ e:
• Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
• Press the hot key (1 to 5)
[
3. SELECT
WARD
NUMBER
Timer duration
Entry
1
015 Seconds
Ward number selected - timer
will apply to this ward. Only
those wards allocated to
zones are available
e.g. |
To select the ward that the timer
applies to, press| or ¬ to scroll
Entry
2
015 Seconds
[
4. EDIT TIMER
VALUE
Entry
2
> 015 Seconds
e.g. | five times
Entry
2
> 020 Seconds
[
To edit timer valu e:
• Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
• Enter the value (e.g. 020)
Press[ to save changes and continue
The Ward Timers option enables you to set up time periods that relate to wards, such as the
entry and exit times.
) The timers specified in option 1-8-3 (page 82) are used when wards are set via a ward
group.
) It is possible to have different entry and exit times for each ward. Therefore, if for example,
more than one ward is set at the same time, different exit times may apply for each ward.
Ward Timer Types
In step 2, choose the timer type (for defaults see page 133 ):
1 – Exit
This determines the time allowed to exit a ward once the option to set it has been made.
The exit time is used by, for example, the Timed Exit setting mode (page 76).
60
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-5
2 – Entry Delay
When the ward is set and the entry procedure is initiated, either by activation of the Final
Exit zone (page 23) or by activation of a Normal Alm zone that has the Entry attribute
(page 29) set to Yes, the Entry Delay timer starts to count down. The timer should allow
the user sufficient time to enter a valid user code after entering the building. If a valid user
code has not been entered when the timer reaches zero, an internal alarm (page 22) is
generated and the 2nd Entry Dly timer (page 63) is started. If the 2nd Entry Dly timer
reaches zero, a full alarm is generated, unless overridden by option 1-8-4 (page 83).
3 – Bell Delay
When a full alarm is triggered for the selected ward, activation of the external bell and
strobe outputs can be delayed by the value of this timer. This timer or Sys Bell Dly (page
62) is used, depending on the setting of the Ward Bell Time/Global Bell Time configuration
option (page 86).
)
The Bell & Strobe ward attribute (page 37) determines which wards trigger the bell
and strobe outputs.
)
Bell Delay or Sys Bell Dly are considered to be zero if Bells on Unconf (page 90) is
selected.
4 – Bell Duration
When the Bell Delay for the selected ward has expired, the duration of the external bell
output can be controlled by the value of this timer. This timer or Sys Bell Dur (page 63) is
used, depending on the setting of the Ward Bell Time/Global Bell Time configuration
option (page 86).
)
If Confirmation On and Bells on Unconf are selected (page 89), the bell and strobe
outputs switch off and the system re-arms if a second zone does not trigger within
the Confirmation time (page 62). If a second zone does trigger, causing a
confirmed alarm, the bell output (but not the strobe) is switched off when the Bell
Duration or Sys Bell Dur timer has expired. Bell Duration and Sys Bell Duration are
started after any programmed bell delays.
61
Engineer Menu 1-5
Engineering Manual
Option 1-5-2: Setting Up System Timers
Eng 1 Menu 5
Timers
[
Timers
Ward Timers
1. SELECT "SYSTEM
TIMERS" OPTION
1
|
Timers
System Timers
2
X
[
2. SELECT
TIMER TYPE
Confirmation 01
030 Minutes
e.g. |
Sys Bell Dly 02
000 Minutes
To select the timer typ e:
• Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
• Press the hot key (e.g. 05)
[
3. EDIT TIMER
VALUE
Sys Bell Dly 02
> 000 Minutes
e.g. | five times
Sys Bell Dly 02
> 005 Minutes
[
To select timer valu e:
• Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
• Enter the value (e.g. 010)
Press[ to save changes and view
next timer
The System Timers option enables you to set up time periods and counters that relate to the
whole system, such as entry and exit delays, bell duration and the number of "knocks" required
for alarm activation.
System Timer Types
In step 2, choose the timer type (for defaults see page 133 ):
01 – Confirmation
This timer is relevant only if the Confirmation On option is selected (page 89). A confirmed
alarm occurs only if the two zones trigger within the time period specified by this timer. If
the second zone is not triggered within this time period, the sounders and strobe are
cancelled, overriding the Bell Duration (page 61) or Sys Bell Dur (page 63) time, and the
system re-arms (isolating any zones that are still triggered).
02 – Sys Bell Dly
When a full alarm is triggered, activation of the external bell and strobe outputs can be
delayed by the value of this timer. This timer is used only if the system is full set and the
Global Bell Time configuration option is selected (see page 86). Otherwise, the ward Bell
Delay timer (page 61) is used.
62
Engineering Manual
)
Engineer Menu 1-5
Bell Delay or Sys Bell Dly are considered to be zero if Bells on Unconf (page 90) is
selected.
03 – Sys Bell Dur
When the Sys Bell Dly has expired, the duration of the external bell output can be
controlled by the value of this timer. This timer is used only if the system is full set and the
Global Bell Time configuration option is selected (see page 86). Otherwise, the ward Bell
Duration timer (page 61) is used.
04 – Anti Mask
A masking zone or a zone that has a masking status (page 26), must remain active for the
duration of the Anti Mask timer for a masking alert or masking outputs to activate.
05 – Line Fault
This timer delays the audible line fault indication when a telephone line fault occurs. The
display and any PSTN Line Fault outputs (page 45) are not affected.
06 – AC Off Delay
This timer delays the AC Mains Fault alert and outputs programmed as Mains Power Off
(page 45) when the mains power is removed.
07 – Soak Test
This timer determines the length of time that a Soak Test (page 28) is applied to a zone. If
the timer is set to 000, zones will remain on test until the Soak Test attribute is removed.
08 – Exit Settle
Detectors that are on the exit route sometimes take several seconds to settle after
activation. This timer is used to provide a delay to ensure that detectors used by Final Exit
(page 23) or Exit Terminator (page 23) zones are not still active when the panel sets the
ward.
09 – 2nd Entry Dly
When a ward Entry Delay timer (page 61) has expired, the 2nd Entry Dly timer starts to
count down. If at the end of this time the ward has not been unset, a full alarm (page 22)
is generated for the relevant ward, unless overridden by option 1-8-4 (page 83).
10 – Double Knock
This is the “Double Knock” time window in which a specified number of zone activations
must occur to generate an alarm condition, or the zone must remain active for the whole
duration of this time to generate an alarm condition. This applies only to zones that have
the Double Knock attribute (page 28).
The number of zone activations needed is determined by the Double Knocks counter
(page 65).
11 – Abort Period
This timer controls the duration of the output types Alarm Abort (system output, page 48)
or Alm Abort (ward output, page 55).
63
Engineer Menu 1-5
Engineering Manual
12 – Abort Delay
This timer is relevant for certain alarm conditions that require an engineer or remote reset.
If a user silences the alarm within the Abort Delay time period, the alarm will not require
an engineer or remote reset. When an alarm occurs, the Alarm Abort (page 48) or Alm
Abort (page 55) output is activated only if the system is unset within this period. If the
system is unset after this period, the output is not activated.
13 – Courtesy time
This timer is used to control the duration of Courtesy Light outputs (page 44).
14 – Menu Time-Out
This timer controls how long a user option remains displayed before timing out and
returning the system to the normal standby screen that shows the current date and time.
15 – Beam Pair
This is the time window in which two zones with the Beam Pair attribute (page 30) must
activate for the system to generate an alarm condition.
16 – Defer Setting
This setting is relevant to auto-set timers (page 70). The Defer Setting timer specifies the
number of minutes that the control unit defers auto-setting once a user enters a valid
access code.
At a pre-determined interval before a ward auto-sets, keypad sounders operate to warn
users that the ward is about to set. Entering a user code during this warning time defers
auto-setting for the time specified by Defer Setting timer. The length of the warning
interval before the ward auto-sets is controlled by the A.Set Warning timer (see page 66).
17 – Service Time
The installation company may use this timer to periodically generate “SERVICE REQUIRED”
message so that the user is reminded that a service call is required. The users may
continue to set and unset the system. When the engineer attends the site and enters the
engineer code, the message is cleared. The service timer is re-started when the engineer
re-selects this timer option. To disable this feature set the timer to 000.
18 – Select Menu
This timer determines how long the prompt to select user levels is displayed after a user
code is entered. Once the timer has expired, then:
EITHER a) The panel attempts to set any unset wards that the user code has been
programmed to auto-set (User option 2-4).
OR b) If the user code has no auto-set wards then the display shows shows the ward
selection menu for 10 seconds. If the user does not enter a selection the display reverts
back to the time and date.
19 – Keys Till Tamp
The value of this counter determines how many illegal key presses a user can enter before
the control unit recognises a code tamper. Once the control unit recognises a code
tamper it locks out the keypad for five minutes and logs a code tamper event.
64
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-5
20 – No. of Rearms
At the end of the Bell Duration time (page 61), the system rearms all zones that have been
triggered, but which are now no longer in the alarm state. Zones that are still triggered are
isolated. This counter controls the number of times that a zone can be armed before it is
isolated.
)
This timer applies only if Confirmation Off is selected (page 89), and only for zones
in a ward selected by the Re-arms attribute (page 37). Refer to page 62 for details
of how the system re-arms if Confirmation On is selected.
21 – Remote Resets
This counter determines how many “Remote Resets” can occur before the system locks
into engineer reset only. When the engineer attends the site and enters the engineer code,
the counter is restored to its original value. The Remote Reset feature can be selectively
applied to wards; see page 36.
22 – Double Knocks
This counter is used only for wards selected by the Multiply Ack attribute (page 37). The
counter determines how many “knocks” are needed within the Double Knock period (page
63) to cause an alarm at a zone that has the Double Knock attribute (page 28). If a ward is
not selected to use this counter, two activations are required.
23 – Tst Call Strt
Specify a value for this timer only if you want on-board modem to make automatic test
calls to an Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) at fixed intervals. These are known as "static" test
calls. The panel will make the first test call at the time you specify for Tst Call Strt, then at
fixed intervals specified by the Test Call Int timer. For example, if you specify 003 for Tst
Call Strt, and 010 for Test Call Int, the panel will make the first test call at 03:00, then the
next calls at 13:00, 23:00, 09:00, 19:00, etc.
24 – Test Call Int
If you have specified a value other than zero for Tst Call Strt, this timer sets the fixed
interval (in hours) between automatic test calls to an Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC).
If Tst Call Strt is zero, Test Call Int specifies the maximum period of time between calls to
an Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC). The on-board modem automatically performs a test call
if it has not made another type of call to the ARC within this period of time. This is known
as "dynamic" test call.
Setting the value to zero prevents static or dynamic test calls from being made.
25 – Reset Alg.
This is applicable only if the Remote Reset attribute is set for a ward (page 36). The Reset
Alg option is a 3-digit number that identifies the algorithm used to generate the remote
reset code. An alternative algorithm can be selected, but this must correspond to the
algorithm used by the Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC), otherwise the code returned will be
incorrect.
If the value of Reset Alg is greater than 20, a 6-digit seed code is generated, and the
remote reset code returned is 6 digits.
65
Engineer Menu 1-5
Engineering Manual
26 – Payment Time
Not available in software version 3.11.07
27 – Hi Security
This timer determines the length of time that a secure ward (page 37) can remain unset
before the system automatically attempts to set it. When a secure ward is unset, activation
of any zone in that ward resets the timer.
28 – Supervision Warning
When set to 000 this timer disables all supervision warnings. When set to a positive
number between 001 and 999 this timer specifies the period in minutes that the control
unit waits after receiving a supervision signal from a transmitter. The control unit re-starts
the timer every time it receives a supervision signal from a transmitter. If the timer expires
before the next supervision signal is received then the control unit starts a supervision
warning and logs the event. The user can override the warning when setting the system.
The default setting for this timer is 16 minutes.
29 – Supervision Fail
When set to 000 this timer disables all supervision failures. When set to a positive number
between 001 and 999 the timer specifies in minutes the period that the control unit waits
after receiving a supervision signal from a detector. The control unit re-starts the timer
every time it receives a supervision signal from a transmitter. If the timer expires before
the next supervision signal is received then the control unit starts a supervision failure,
logs the event, and generates an alert.
The default value is 120 minutes (suitable for EN50131 systems).
On an EN50131 compliant system the detectors should transmit every four minutes.
30 – Set Status
This timer works in when Option 1 - 9 - 3 -20 is set to Timed (see page 95). When
set to 000 this timer stops the keypad showing the set/unset status after a the control unit
has completed setting a ward. When set to a positive number (and Option 1 - 9 - 320 is set to Timed) then the keypad displays the set/unset status for the number of
seconds you select. If you set Option 1 - 9 - 3 -20 to Never or Always then this
time has no effect.
31 – Defer Count
This option specifies the maximum number of times that a user can defer an auto-set. You
can specify any number in the range 000 to 999. See page 70 for a description of setting
up auto-set timers.
32 – A.Set Warning
This option specifies the Auto-Set Warning time in minutes. You can enter any number
between 1 and 255. Use this option in conjunction with the Defer Setting timer, see page
64.
66
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-5
Options 1-5-3 to 1-5-5: Calendar Timers
With software version 3.11.xx the time switches and auto set timers work in a completely
different way to earlier versions.
Overview
Options 1 - 5 - 5 and 1 - 5 - 4 allow you to set up Time Switches and Auto Set timers.
Time Switches operate outputs that you have programmed as Time Switch outputs (see page
52). Auto-Set timers set and unset selected wards at times that you specify. Both types of timer
repeat at given times of day and selected days of the week.
Specify the outputs controlled by the timers by using Engineer option 1 -4 .
You can also use Option 1 - 5 - 3 to specify times when the action of Time Switches and
Auto-Set timers should be suspended. These events are called “Exceptions”. An Exception has a
start time and date, and an end time and date. Exceptions repeat once a year. Any of the Time
Switches or Auto Set times can be allocated to one or more Exceptions.
The three control unit types have the following capacities:
M1000/M2000
M800
Comments
Time
Switches
10
5
Each with three sets of on and
off times.
Auto Sets
16
8
Each of which can be allocated
to any ward.
Exceptions
30
30
To help keep track of what the Time Switches, Auto Set timers and Exceptions are intended for,
the control unit allows you to give each item a short text description. The keypad shows this
description when you scroll through summary displays within Options 1 - 5 - 3 to 1 - 5 5.
The user can also program calendar timers from User option 2 - 0. Refer also to the Defer
Setting timer (option 1 - 5 - 2 -16) and the Defer Count (see page 66).
The following pages describe how to set up Time Switches and Auto Set Timers. If you have any
periods where you do not wish these timers to operate then program them using Exceptions. To
make programming easier program your Exceptions first, so that they will be available while you
are setting up the timers.
67
Engineer Menu 1-5
Engineering Manual
Option 1-5-3 : Exceptions
Timers
Exceptions
3
[
1. SELECT THE
XCEPTIO
E
N
Exception No.
Exception
01
To select the Exception :
· Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
· Press the hot key (e.g. 02)
|
Exception
02
Note 1: At this point you can see a
summary of the Exception details
by pressing r repeatedly.
[
Exception
Description
02
[
Indicates description
is currently blank.
2. KEY IN DESCRIPTION
^ Description
Key in text: see Appendix A. Press
| or ¬ to move the cursor to the
next character. Press [ to save
changes and continue.
Exception
02
Description
|
Press| to move on to Start
Time
3. KEY IN T
SART TIME/D
ATE
Indicates Exception
is currently disabled.
Exception
02
## ### - ## ###
See Note 2 below.
[
EX 08 Start Time
>00:00
EX 08 Start Date
>01 JAN
4. KEY IN END TIME/D
ATE
EX 08 End Time
>00:00
EX 08 End Date
>01 JAN
Exception
02
25 DEC - 02 JAN
]
Note 2: To disable an Exception
key in 0000. This clears the start
and end dates and times.
Use the following steps and the flowchart to program an exception:
68
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-5
Step 1 – Select the Exception
The number at the top right shows the currently selected Exception. Use the ¬ and | The keys
to select the Exception you wish to set up. Once you have selected an Exception, you can see an
overview of its details by pressing r repeatedly. To start editing an Exception press [.
Step 2 – Key in a Description
The description can be up to 16 characters long. See Appendix A for instructions on how to key
in text. When the text is complete, press [. Press | to move on to the Start Time.
Step 3 – Key in the Start Time and Date
The bottom line of the display shows the current start and end date of the selected Exception. If
the display shows “## ### - ## ###” then the Exception is disabled.
Press [ to begin editing the Start Time.
Key in the start time in 24 hour format (hours then minutes). Press [.
Key in the day of the month. Use leading zeroes for days 01 to 09, Press [.
Use the | or ¬ key to select the month. Press [ to save your changes and move on to the End
Time.
Step 4 – Key in the End Time and Date.
Key in the end time in 24 hour format (hours then minutes). Press [.
Key in the day of the month. Use leading zeroes for days 01 to 09. Press [.
Use the | or ¬ key to select the month. Press [ to store the details you have entered.
The display shows the start and end dates.
Press ] to return to Step 1 so that you can select another Exception.
To Clear (Disable) an Exception
Use the ¬ and | keys to select the Exception you wish to clear and press [.
Key in 0000. The display shows ## ### - ## ###.
Press ].
The control unit disables the Exception. Note that the control unit also changes the description
to “Disabled”.
69
Engineer Menu 1-5
Engineering Manual
Option 1-5-4: Auto Sets
This option enables you to define up to 16 Auto-Set timers. You must associate each timer with
one or more wards, which the control unit will set and unset at the specified times. While setting
up an Auto Set you can select any Exceptions that you have already programmed.
Timers
Auto Sets
2
[
1. SELECT THE TAU
O SET
5. SELECT WARDS
Auto Set
To select the Auto Set:
· Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
· Press the hot key (e.g. 02)
Note 1: At this point you
can see a summa ry of the
Auto Set details by
pressing r repeatedl y.
Note 2: If requried, press |
to skip to step 3.
01
To select wards press any key 1
to 8 . “A” indicates wards in
number range 1 to 8.
|
Auto Set
02
[
02
Auto Set
02
25 DEC - 02 JAN
[
|
2. KEY IN DESCRIPTION
^ Description
Key in text: see Appendix A. Press
| or ¬ to move the cursor to the
next character. Press [ to save
changes and continue.
Auto Set
02
Description
Press| to move on to Start
Time
|
6. SELECTXCEPTION
E
S
Shows number of Exceptions
availabl e.
“No” shows that Exception
does not apply to this Auto
Set.
Note 5: Pressr to see text of
Exception description.
To select following Exceptions,
press | repeatedl y.
3. KEY IN SET TIME/D
AYS
Indicates Exception
is currently disabled.
e.g. 13
AS 02 Wards
Ward >1*3*....
[
Auto Set
Description
AS 02 Wards
Ward >****....
Auto Set
02
Exceptions : 02
[
AS 02 Ex. 01 No
06 APR - 09 APR
|
AS 02 Ex. 02 No
24 DEC - 01 JAN
Auto Set
02
## ### - ## ###
[
[
AS 02 Ex. 02 >No
24 DEC - 01 JAN
AS 02 Set Time
>00:00
Pressr to toggle between
“Yes” and “No”.
Note 3:
1= Sunda y, 2=Monda y. ..7=Saturda y.
0=Clear all day s.
9=set all day s.
4. KEY IN UNSET TIME/D
AYS
AS 02 Set Days
>* * * * * * * *
“Yes” shows that Exceptions
now applies to this Auto Set.
r
AS 02 Ex.02 >Yes
24 DEC - 01 JAN
[
AS 02 Ex.02 Yes
24 DEC - 01 JAN
AS 02 Unset Time
>00:00
]
AS 08 Unset Days
>* * * * * * * *
Note 4: To disable an
Exception key in 0000.
This clears the start and
end dates and time s.
[
Note: If you specify a start time that is close to the current time shown by the control unit clock
(less than the number of minutes held in the A.Set Warning timer, Option 1-5-2-32, see
page 66), then the Auto Set will not take action until the following start day.
70
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-5
Step 1 – Select an Auto Set
Press | or ¬ to select an Auto Set timer. If you wish, you can key in the number of the Auto Set
timer to select it directly (use leading zeroes for timers 1 to 9). Once you see the required Auto
Set timer on the display you can show a summary of its details by pressing r repeatedly.
Press [ to start editing the timer.
(At this point, if you do not wish to key in a description, you can skip to step 3 by pressing |.)
Step 2 – Key in the Auto Set Description
When the bottom line of the screen shows “Description” press [ once more.
Key in the text of the description. See Appendix A for instructions on how to key in text. When
the text is complete, press [. Press | to move on to Set Time/Days.
Step 3 – Key in Set Time/Days
If the bottom line of the screen shows “## ### – ## ###” then the timer is disabled. Press [ to
start editing the setting time.
Key in the start of the setting time in 24 hour format (hours then minutes). Press [ to save changes.
Press any number 1 to 7 in order to specify the days of the week on which to start setting. Note that
1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday and so on until 7 = Saturday. If you wish to specify every day of the week
press 9. If you wish to clear all the days of the week press 0. Press [ to save your changes.
Step 4 – Key In the Unset Time/Days
Key in the unsetting time in 24 hour format (hours then minutes). Press [ to save changes.
Press any number 1 to 7 to specify the days of the week on which to unset (see step 3).
Press [ to save your changes.
Step 5 – Select Wards.
Key in any number 1 to 8 to specify wards 1 to 8. The display shows a “*” for wards that will not
set. Press [ to save your changes.
Step 6 – Select Exceptions
Press | to move on to selecting Exceptions. The bottom of the display shows the number of
Exceptions currently allocated to the Auto Set.
Press [ to change the Exceptions allocated to the current Auto Set timer. The top right corner
of the display shows “No” if the Exception does not apply to the Auto Set timer, and “Yes” if it
does. (Press r if you want to see a description of the Exception.)
Press | to select the Exception you wish to apply.
Press [ to display a cursor next to the “No”.
Press r to change the “No” to a “Yes”. (If you change your mind press r again.). Press [ to
save your changes.
Press ] to leave applying Exceptions. Press ] again if you have finished editing the current
Auto Set timer.
71
Engineer Menu 1-5
Engineering Manual
Option 1-5-5: Defining Time Switches
Timers
Time Switches
2
[
4. SELECTXCEPTION
E
S
1. SELECT TIME SWI
TCH
Time Switch
To select the Time Switch:
· Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
· Press the hot key (e.g. 02 )
Shows number of Exceptions
currently appliied to Time Switch.
|
Note 1: At this point you
can see a summary of the
Time Switch details by
pressing r repeatedly.
Time Switch
Note 2: To override the
current status of a Time
Switch see box at bottom
right of pag e.
Time Switch
Status: Off
Note 3: If requried, press|
to skip to step 3.
01
02
“No” shows that Exception
does not apply to this Time
Switch.
Note 5: Pressr to see text of
Exception description.
[
02
To select following Exceptions,
press | repeatedly.
TS 02 Ex. 01 No
06 APR - 09 APR
|
[
02
TS 02 Ex. 02 >No
24 DEC - 01 JAN
|
2. KEY IN DESCRIPTION
^ Description
Key in text: see Appendix A. Press
| or ¬ to move the cursor to the
next character. Press [ to save
changes and continue.
Pressr to toggle between
“Yes” and “No”.
“Yes” shows that Exceptions
now applies to this Auto Set.
r
TS 02 Ex.02 >Yes
24 DEC - 01 JAN
[
TS 02 Ex.02 Yes
24 DEC - 01 JAN
Time Switch
02
Description
Press| to move on to Time 1
[
TS 02 Ex. 02 No
24 DEC - 01 JAN
|
Time Switch
Description
Time Switch
02
Exceptions : 00
|
|
Repeat for other exception s
3. KEY IN TIME/D
AYS for (1), (2) & (3
)
Time Switch
02
(1)##:## - ##:##
Indicates first of three
timers.
[
OVERRIDING A TIME SWI
TCH
Timers
Time Switches
TS 02.1 On Time
>00:00
2
[
Time Switch
TS 02.1 On Days
>* * * * * * * *
To select the Time Switch:
· Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
· Press the hot key (e.g. 02)
|
Time Switch
TS 02.1 Off Time
>00:00
01
02
[
Time Switch
Status: Off
02
[
TS 02.1 Off Days
>* * * * * * * *
Time Switch
Status:>Off
[
Time Switch
Status:>On
02
r
Time Switch
02
(1)09:10 - 09:15
Repeat for timers (2)
and (3), if required.
|
|
72
02
Press [ to save changes and
continue.
Time Switch
Status: On
02
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-5
Use the following steps and the flowchart to set up Time Switches:
Step 1 – Select the Time Switch
Press | or ¬ to select a Time Switch. If you wish, you can key in the number of the Time Switch
to select it directly (use leading zeroes for timers 1 to 9). Once you see the required Time Switch
on the display you can show a summary of its details by pressing r repeatedly.
Press [ to start editing the Time Switch.
(At this point, if you do not wish to override the Time Switch’s current status or key in a
description, you can skip to step 3 by pressing | twice.)
Step 2 – Key in Description
When the bottom line of the screen shows “Description” press [ once more.
Key in the text of the description. When the text is complete, press [. Press | to move on to
specifying the On and Off Time/Days.
Step 3 – Key in Time/Days for Timers (1), (2) & (3)
There are three independent on/off timers for each Time Switch. The top line of the display
shows the number of the timer as digit after a decimal point following the number of the Time
Switch. For example, the first of the three timers for Time Switch 1 is “TS 01.1”, the second is “TS
01.2”.
If the bottom line of the screen shows “## ### – ## ###” then the timer is disabled. Press [ to
start editing the setting time.
Key in the start of the setting time in 24 hour format (hours then minutes). Press [ to save your
changes.
Press any number 1 to 7 in order to specify the days of the week on which to start setting. Note
that 1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday and so on until 7 = Saturday. If you wish to specify every day of
the week press 9. If you wish to clear all the days of the week press 0.
Press [ to save your changes.
Step 4 – Select Exceptions
Press | to move on to selecting Exceptions. The bottom of the display shows the number of
Exceptions currently allocated to the Time Switch.
Press [ to start allocating any of the pre-programmed Exceptions to the current Time Switch.
The top right corner of the display shows “No” if the Exception does not apply to the Time
Switch, and “Yes” if it does. (Press r if you want to see a description of the Exception.)
Press | to select the Exception you wish to apply.
Press [ to display a cursor next to the “No”.
Press r to change the “No” to a “Yes”. (If you change your mind press r again.). Press [ to
save your changes.
Press ] to leave applying Exceptions. Press ] again if you have finished editing the current
Time Switch.
73
Engineer Menu 1-5
Engineering Manual
Overriding a Time Switch’s Status
At any time you can change the status of a Time Switch: if it is On you can turn it Off, and if it is
Off you can turn it On. To do this:
Select Option 1 - 5 - 5 .
Press | or ¬ to select a Time Switch. If you wish, you can key in the number of the Time Switch
to select it directly (use leading zeroes for timers 1 to 9).
Press [ to start editing the Time Switch.
The bottom line of the display shows “Status:” and the word “On” or “Off”.
Press ] again.
The display shows a “>” cursor just after the work “Status:”.
Press r to change the status. (Press r a second time if you change your mind.) The control
unit changes the status of the output.
Press [ to save your changes.
Example: Auto Setting
Staff work normal office hours from Monday to Friday. The panel needs to be unset at 8am
from Monday to Friday; the panel need to be set at 7pm on those same days. There are bank
holidays at April the 1st and Christmas.
Configuration:
Config
Auto-Set Timer 1
Exception period 01
Exception period 02
Unset Time
Unset Days Of Week
Set Time
Set Days Of Week
Ward List
Exception periods
Start Date
StartTime
End Date
End Time
Start Date
Start Time
End Date
End Time
Actions:
During the normal working week:
Day
Fri
Mon
Mon
Tues
Tues
Wed
Wed
74
Time
19:00 hrs
08:00 hrs
19:00 hrs
08:00 hrs
19:00 hrs
08:00 hrs
19:00 hrs
Auto-Set Timer Action
Set
Unset
Set
Unset
Set
Unset
Set
Value
08:00 hrs
Mon, Tues, Wed, Thurs, Fri
19:00 hrs
Mon, Tues, Wed, Thurs, Fri
1
01, 02
1st Apr
00:01
1st Apr
23:59
25th Dec
00:01
2nd Jan
00:01
Engineering Manual
Day
Thurs
Thurs
Fri
Fri
Mon
Time
08:00 hrs
19:00 hrs
08:00 hrs
19:00 hrs
08:00 hrs
Engineer Menu 1-5
Auto-Set Timer Action
Unset
Set
Unset
Set
Unset
At April 1st
Day
Fri
Tues
Date
29th Mar
2nd Apr
Time
19:00 hrs
08:00 hrs
Auto-Set Timer Action
Set
Unset
Time
19:00 hrs
08:00 hrs
Auto-Set Timer Action
Set
Unset
At Christmas:
Day
Mon
Wed
Date
24th Dec
2nd Jan
Option 1-5-6: Defining Code-Lock Timers
This option enables you to define up to eight code-lock timers, each of which is associated with
up to ten users. The timer prevents the system from accepting the users' access codes at
specified times.
You can define each code lock to have one switch on (codes not accepted) and one switch off
(codes accepted) time. You can also choose the days of the week on which each of the eight
timers operate.
If a user enters their user code while the code-lock timer is on, the display shows "Sorry. Your
code is locked out".
The option is also available from User option 2-0-4. Please refer to the Manager's Manual if you
need details of how to define code-lock timers.
75
Engineer Menu 1-6
Engineering Manual
Option 1-6: Defining the Setting Mode
Eng
1 Menu 6
1234567890123456
Setting
Modes
1234567890123456
[
Exit For Ward>1
Timed Exit
e.g. |
Ward number (only
those wards allocated
to zones are available)
1. SELECT
WARD
To select the war d, press
| or ¬ to scroll
Exit For Ward>2
Timed Exit
[
2. SELECT THE
SETTING MODE
Exit For Ward 2
> Timed Exit
e.g. |
Exit For Ward 2
> Instant Set
[
To select the setting mod e:
• Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
• Press the mode hot key
Press[ to save changes and continue
4. EDIT TIMER
VALUE
This option determines the events that must take place before the panel arms the selected
ward. Each ward can have a different setting.
) The setting specified in option 1-8-2 (page81) is used when wards are set via a ward group.
1 – Final Exit
Select this option if you want the ward to set once the user has chosen to set the ward
and activated a Final Exit zone (page 23). The panel sets the ward after the number of
seconds specified by the Exit Settle time (page 63).
2 – Exit Terminate
Select this option if you want the ward to set once the user has chosen to set the ward
and activated an Exit Terminator zone (page 23). The panel sets the ward after the number
of seconds specified by the Exit Settle time (page 63).
3 – Timed Exit
Once the user has chosen to set the ward, this option causes the ward to set after the
number of seconds specified by the Exit time (page 60).
The Exit Settle time (page 63) is included within the Exit time. Therefore, if the Exit time is,
for example, 30 seconds and the Exit Settle time is10 seconds, the Exit Settle period starts
20 seconds into the Exit period. The minimum period that the panel can set the ward is
after 10 seconds (this would be used if, for example, you set the Exit time to zero).
Activation of an Exit Terminator zone (if used) can shorten the period for the ward to set.
For example, if the Exit Terminator zone is triggered 5 seconds into the Exit period, and
the Exit Settle time is 7 seconds, the zone is set 12 seconds after the user has chosen to
set the ward.
76
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-6
4 – Instant Set
Select this option if you want the ward to set quickly.
The ward sets 10 seconds after the user has chosen to set the ward (which should be
enough time for sensors to settle).
5 – Deferred Set
This is the same as Timed Exit, except that if any zones are activated during the exit
procedure, the Exit timer (page 60) is restarted.
6 – Lock Set
Select this option if you are using a lock switch connected to a Lock Set zone type to set
the alarm system. This enables the ward's Final Exit zone to be a normal Normal Alm zone
while the exit door is locked. See page 25 for further details.
77
Engineer Menu 1-7
Engineering Manual
Option 1-7: Customising Text
Eng
1 Menu 7
1234567890123456
Custom
Text
1234567890123456
[
1. SELECT MESSAGE TYPE
Custom Text
Reset Message
1
e.g. | five times
Custom Text
Group Names
6
To select message type:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the message type hot key
[
Viewing Group
1
To select the output group number:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Enter group number
e.g. |
Viewing Group
2. SELECT OUTPUT GROUP
(APPLICABLE ONLY TO
GROUP NAMES OPTION)
2
3. EDIT TEXT
4. EDIT TIMER VALUE
[
^iewing Group
2
Use the keys similar to the text keys on a
mobile phone (see Appendix A). Press |
or ¬ to move cursor to next character.
Press [ to save changes and continue
This option allows you to edit the following text.
) Some of the following can be edited from User option 1-7.
1 – Reset Message
This is the message that directs users to call an engineer. You may want to add a contact
number.
2 – Location Text
This text can be used to record where the control unit is installed. The text is displayed
using the Location option (page 164).
3 – Printer Title
This is shown when you print the log. You can use this to identify the control unit on
printed reports.
4 – Remote Reset Msg
This directs the user to contact the Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC). You may want to add a
contact number.
78
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-7
5 – Banner Text
This message is shown on the top line of the display when the keypad is in normal
standby mode,. waiting for a code to be entered.
6 – Group Names
These are the names of the ward groups (page 80). The names are displayed when setting
ward groups (see the User's Guide).
79
Engineer Menu 1-8
Engineering Manual
Option 1-8: Setting Up Groups
Option 1-8-1: Assigning Wards to Groups
Eng
1 Menu 8
1234567890123456
Group
Options
1234567890123456
[
1. SELECT "ASSIGN GROUP
OPTION
Group
Options 1
1234567890123456
Assign
Groups
1234567890123456
[
Shows the wards that are
currently in the ward group
Viewing Group 1
Ward : ........
e.g.
|
Viewing Group 2
Ward : ........
2. SELECT
WARD GROUP
NUMBER
To select the ward grou p:
Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the ward group numbe r
[
3. SELECT THE
WARDSYOU
WANT TO BE IN THE
WARD
GROUP
Editing Group 2
Ward > *****...
e.g. 1
Editing Group 2
Ward > 1****...
[
Press ward number 1 to 8 to toggle ward
in group (ward number shown) or not in
group ("*" displayed). A dot (".") indicates
that no zone is in the ward.
Press[ to save changes and continue
4. EDIT TIMER
VALUE
This option enables you to assign wards to groups, which enables a user to set or unset all
wards in a ward group with a single operation (as described in the User's Guide). Each ward
group can contain any combination of wards.
) This option is also available from User option 2-8.
80
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-8
Option 1-8-2: Setting the Ward Group Exit Mode
Eng 1 Menu 8
Group Options
[
Group Options
Assign Groups
1. SELECT "EXIT
MODES" OPTION
1
|
Group Options
Exit Modes
2
X
[
2. SELECT THE
GROUP
Exit For Group 1
Timed Exit
e.g. |
Exit For Group 2
Timed Exit
To select the group:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (e.g. 2)
[
3. SELECT SETTING
MODE
Exit For Group 2
> Timed Exit
e.g. |
Exit For Group 2
> Instant Set
[
To select setting mode:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1 to 7)
Press [ to save changes
This option is relevant only when a user sets wards through a ward group. The option specifies
the exit mode for the wards in the selected ward group. You can specify a different exit mode
for each ward group. When a ward group is set, the mode you select here is used instead of the
modes selected in option 1-6 (page 76).
In addition to the options documented from page 76, the following option is also available:
7 – Silent Set
Selecting this option will cause the wards in the ward group to set silently.
) Assigning the Access attribute (page 28) to walk-through zones prevents "zone triggered"
sounds from occurring during the exit or entry procedure
Example
Assume the following:
If ward 1 is set as "Timed Exit" in option 1-6, and
ward 2 is set as "Instant Set" in option 1-6, and
ward group 1 (which contains wards 1 and 2) is set to "Exit Terminate" in option 1-8-2,
Then:
81
Engineer Menu 1-8
Engineering Manual
When setting ward group 1, "Exit Terminate" is used for both wards 1 and 2.
When setting ward 1, "Timed Exit" is used.
When setting ward 2, "Instant Set" is used.
Option 1-8-3: Setting the Ward Group Timers
Eng 1 Menu 8
Group Options
[
Group Options
Assign Groups
1. SELECT "GROUP
TIMERS" OPTION
1
3
Group Options
Group Timers
3
X
[
Group Timers
Exit
2. SELECT TIMER
TYPE
1
e.g. |
Group Timers
Entry
2
To select the timer type:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1 to 4)
[
3. SELECT GROUP
Entry Timer
>1
015 Seconds
e.g. |
Entry Timer >2
015 Seconds
To select group:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (e.g. 2)
[
4. EDIT TIMER VALUE
Entry Timer
2
> 015 Seconds
e.g. |
Entry Timer
2
> 016 Seconds
[
To select timer value:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Enter the value (e.g. 010)
Press [ to save changes
This option is relevant only when a user sets wards through a ward group. The option specifies
the timer values for the wards in the selected ward group. You can specify different timer
settings for each ward group.
When a ward group is set, the timer values you specify here are used instead of the values
specified in option 1-5-1 (page 60). Page 81 gives an example of how ward group setting
modes are used; ward group timers operate in a similar way.
82
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-8
Option 1-8-4: Setting the Ward Group Alarm Response
Eng 1 Menu 8
Group Options
[
Group Options
Assign Groups
1. SELECT "ALARM
RESPONSE"
OPTION
1
4
Group Options 4
Alarm Response
X
[
2. SELECT GROUP
Alarm Response
Grp. 1
Full
e.g. |
Alarm Response
Grp. 2
Full
To select group:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (e.g. 2)
[
3. SELECT SETTING
MODE
Alarm Response
Grp. 2>
Full
e.g. |
Alarm Response
Grp. 2>
Local
[
To select setting mode:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1 to 3)
Press [ to save changes
This option is relevant only when a user sets a ward group. The option specifies how the system
responds to an alarm.
You can specify a different setting for each ward group.
) Refer to the notes on page 34 for details of the keypad sounders that operate when an
alarm occurs.
1 – Full
Causes an alarm to operate keypad sounders, extension loudspeaker, external sounders,
strobe and communications (if used).
2 – Local
Causes an alarm to operate keypad sounders, extension loudspeakers, external sounders
and strobe only.
3 – Internal
Causes an alarm to operate keypad sounders and extension loudspeakers only.
83
Engineer Menu 1-9
Engineering Manual
Option 1-9: Choosing the Configuration Options
Eng
1 Menu 9
1234567890123456
Configuration
1234567890123456
[
Configuration
General
1
e.g. |
Configuration
DD243
2
1. SELECT WHETHER TO CONFIGURE
GENERAL, DD243 OR EN50131
To select the configuration type:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the option hot key
[
2. SELECT CONFIGURATION OPTION
DD243
Confirmation
1
On
e.g. |
DD243
2
Sndrs on Unconf
To select the configuration option:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the option hot key
Press r to toggle setting
Option 1-9-1: Choosing General Configuration Options
(For defaults see page 133.)
01 – Ward OFF / Ward ON
Ward OFF – With this option selected, a zone that is in multiple wards is armed when any
one of its wards is set. The zone is disarmed when any one of its wards is unset.
Ward ON – With this option selected, a zone that is in multiple wards is armed only if all of
its wards are set. The zone is disarmed when any one of its wards is unset.
02 – Bell Is an SAB / Bell is an SCB
Bell Is an SAB – The control panel bell output applies 0V when active.
Bell is an SCB – The control panel bell output removes 0V when active.
03 – View Alms Unset / View Alms P.set
View Alms Unset – When the system is part set and an alarm occurs in a set ward, no
information is displayed until the system is unset. The user can display details of the alarm
by entering a user code and viewing the Alerts.
View Alms P.set– When the system is part set and alarm occurs in a set ward, the alarm
information is displayed on all keypads immediately the alarm occurs.
04 – Engr Authorised / User Authorised
Engr Authorised – When using Downloader software, data in the control panel can be
overwritten without the user's knowledge.
User Authorised – When using Downloader software, data in the control panel can be
overwritten only with user authorisation, from User option 2-6-1 (see the Manager's
Manual).
84
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-9
05 – On-Line (Keypad) Enabled / On-Line (Keypad) Disabled
On-Line Enabled – When using Downloader software, the On-Line Keypad feature in the
Downloader software is enabled.
On-Line Disabled – When using Downloader software, the On-Line Keypad feature is
disabled.
06 – Unset Ward First / Set Ward First
Unset Ward First – When the system is part set and a user code is entered, the “0=Uset
Wards” option is displayed first.
Set Ward First – When the system is part set and a user code is entered, the “0=Set
Selection” option is displayed first.
07 – Digi Normal / Digi Inverted
Digi Normal – The digital communicator outputs on the control panel switch from +12V to
0V when active (+ve removed).
Digi Inverted – The digital communicator outputs on the control panel switch from 0V to
+12V when active (+ve applied).
08 – Chime Audible / Chime Visible
Chime Audible – Zones that have a Chime Tone attribute (page 29) will only generate a
chime tone.
Chime Visible – Zones that have a Chime Tone attribute will generate a chime tone and
the keypads will display the zone that was triggered.
09 – Manual Omits / Automatic Omits
Manual Omits – Zones that have the Omittable attribute (page 28) can be omitted only
from User option 1-2 (see the Manager's Manual).
Automatic Omits – Zones with the Omittable attribute are automatically omitted if they
are active when the system is being set. This option is not relevant if the View Exit Errors
option is selected (page 87).
)
Do not use Automatic Omits if any ward is using a Deferred Set or Lock Set (page
77), otherwise the system will not set.
10 – Omit Tampers No / Omit Tampers Yes
Omit Tampers No – Omitting a zone using User option 1-2 (see the Manager's Manual)
will not also omit tamper faults from that zone.
Omit Tampers Yes – Omitting a zone using User option 1-2 also omits tamper faults from
that zone.
11 – Global Setting / Local Setting
Global Setting – Allows users to set a ward from any keypad, providing their user type
allows this and the ward has been allocated to the user (as specified in User option 2-4;
see the Manager's Manual). Also allows any telecommand to set a ward, providing the
ward has been allocated to the telecommand (see option 2-9).
85
Engineer Menu 1-9
Engineering Manual
Local Setting – Allows a user to set a ward only if the ward has been allocated to the user
and the keypad belongs to that ward (page 34). Also allows a telecommand to set a ward
only if the ward has been allocated to the telecommand’s buttons, and the MRNode has
been allocated to the ward (see Option 1-3-1 to allocate a ward to an MRNode).
12 – Global Unsetting / Local Unsetting
Global Unsetting – Allows users to unset a ward from any keypad, providing the ward has
been allocated to the user (as specified in User option 2-4; see the Manager's Manual).
Also allows any telecommand to unset a ward, providing the ward has been allocated to
the telecommand button (see option 2-9).
Local Unsetting – Allows a user to unset a ward only if the ward has been allocated to the
user and the keypad belongs to that ward (page 34). Also allows a telecommand to unset
a ward only if the ward has been allocated to the telecommand’s buttons, and the
MRNode has been allocated to the ward (see Option 1-3-1 to allocate a ward to an
MRNode.) .
13 – 24hr Omit Global / 24hr Omit Local
24hr Omit Global – Allows a zone to be omitted or shunted from any keypad.
24hr Omit Local – Allows a zone to be omitted or shunted from a keypad only if the zone
is in the same ward as the keypad.
14 – Ward Bell Time / Global Bell Time
Ward Bell Time – Causes the panel to use the Bell Delay (page 61) or Bell Duration (page
61) ward timers when the system is full or part set (i.e. not all wards set).
Global Bell Time – Causes the panel to use the Bell Delay (page 61) or Bell Duration (page
61) ward timers when the system is part set. When the system is full set, the panel uses the
Sys Bell Dly (page 62) and Sys Bell Dur (page 62) timers.
15 – Latching Fire / Nonlatching Fire
Latching Fire – Fire zones (page 23) will cause an alarm when triggered and will be rearmed only after entering a user code twice (once to silence the alarm, and once to reset
the alarm).
Nonlatching Fire – Fire zones will cause an alarm when triggered. On entering a user code,
the alarm is silenced. The zone is re-armed immediately after a user code is entered to
silence the alarm.
16 – Timed code o/p / Latched code o/p
This setting is used for outputs that follow a user code (page 43). It is typically used to
unlock and re-lock a door when a user code is entered.
Timed code o/p – If the output is latched (see step 6 of the flow chart on page 39), the
output activates for approximately 2 seconds when a user code is entered, then
deactivates. If the output is pulsed, the output activates for the duration of the
programmed pulse time, then deactivates.
86
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-9
Latched code o/p – If the output is latched, the output activates when a user code is
entered, then deactivates when the user code is entered again. If the output is pulsed, the
output activates for the duration of the programmed pulse time, then deactivates.
17 – Latching 24hr / Nonlatching 24hr
Latching 24hr – 24 Hour zones (page 22) will cause an alarm when triggered and will be
re-armed only after entering a user code twice (once to silence the alarm, and once to
reset the alarm).
Nonlatching 24hr – 24 Hour zones will cause an alarm when triggered. On entering a user
code, the alarm is silenced. The zone is re-armed immediately after a user code is entered
to silence the alarm.
18 – Access code only / Access all codes
Access code only – Causes outputs that follow the Access Code or Access event (page 45
or 56) to activate only when a user code of type Access is entered.
Access all codes – Causes the outputs to activate when any user code is entered.
19 – NVM is Unlocked / NVM is Locked
NVM is Unlocked – The panel can be reset to its factory defaults by shorting the FACTORY
RESTART pins on the control panel PCB during power-up.
NVM is Locked – The panel cannot be reset to its factory default settings by shorting the
FACTORY RESTART pins. Keypads give a warning sound if the terminals are shorted.
)
If you select this option, it is imperative that you remember the engineer code .
20 – Unshunt, no exit / Unshunt & exit
Unshunt, no exit – Entering a Shunt user code (User option 8-1; see the Manager's
Manual) to reinstate zones does not start the exit procedure.
Unshunt & exit – Entering a Shunt user code to reinstate zones starts the exit procedure
for all the appropriate wards within the shunt group that are already set.
21 – Ignore errors / View exit errors
Ignore errors – When setting the system with one or more zones active (i.e. triggered), the
panel continues with the exit procedure, but displays the zones that are currently active. If
the zones are not cleared at the end of the exit procedure, the internal sounder sounds,
the external strobe flashes and the display shows an error.
View exit errors – When setting the system with one or more zones active, the panel
displays the zones that are currently active and does not allow the system to be set while
zones are active. After clearing the active zones, the panel prompts for confirmation to
continue with the exit procedure.
22 – Mimic, All times / Mimic, Set only
Mimic, All times – When using an output of type Mimic (page 58), the output mimics the
zone at all times.
87
Engineer Menu 1-9
Engineering Manual
Mimic, Set only – When using an output of type Mimic, the output mimics the zone only if
the zone is in a ward that is set. The output mimics the zone, even if the zone is omitted or
shunted (e.g. using User option 1-2 or 1-3; see the Manager's Manual).
23 – Lo Security Eng. / Hi Security Eng.
Lo Security Eng. – You are able to access the Engineer menu options by entering the
engineer code.
Hi Security Eng. – When you enter the engineer code, a code is displayed. You need to
contact the Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) and tell them the code to obtain a remote reset
code. Entering the remote reset code then gives access to the Engineer menu options.
24 – Duress Allow NO / Duress Allow YES
Duress Allow NO – Prevents Duress and Panic user codes from being set up in User option
2-4.
Duress Allow YES – Enables Duress and Panic user codes to be set up in User option 2-4
(please refer to the Manager's Manual).
25 – Keypad PA OFF. / ON
Keypad PA OFF – Switches off the keypad PA feature, as described next.
Keypad PA ON – Causes an audible panic alarm to be generated when keys 1 and 3 keys
are simultaneously pressed at the keypad.
26 – P.Set Hotkey YES/ P.Set Hotkey NO
P.Set Hotkey YES – Enables ward group hot keys to be used to part set/unset the system
(see the Manager's Manual).
P.Set Hotkey NO – Prevents ward group hot keys from being used.
Note: Select P.Set Hotkey NO to allow users to perform silent set using key 8.
27 – Exit Foyer / Inst Set Foyer
Exit Foyer – Causes ward 1 always to use the ward 1 Exit time (page 60) whenever the ward
is set automatically by the Foyer Mode option (page 37).
Inst Set Foyer – Allows ward 1 to ignore the Exit Delay and set instantly when all wards
specified by the Foyer Mode option have been set. This can occur only if the keypad or
keyswitch (page 24) used to set the last ward is not in ward 1.
28 – Unset Entry Wards/Unset All Wards
This option applies to telecommand unset buttons (button 4) that are allocated to more
than one ward. Note that this option works in conjunction with option 1-3-2-15
Entry Unset. A ward must be listed in Option 1-3-2-15 before Option 1-9-128 has any effect.
Unset Entry Wards – A telecommand will unset the ward that has an entry timer running
(or is in alarm), but leave unchanged any other ward that is set (and allocated to the
telecommand unset button).
Unset All Wards – A telecommand will unset all wards allocated to the unset button when
any one of the wards has an entry timer running (or is in alarm).
88
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-9
29 – Radio PA Audible/Silent
Silent – The control unit triggers a silent PA alarm if a telecommand or radio PA starts a
panic alarm. In addition, the keypad does not display any alerts, but triggers the
appropriate outputs.
Audible – The control unit generates PA tones from the sounder and operates the strobe
when a telecommand or radio PA starts a panic alarm, displays alerts on the keypads, and
triggers the appropriate outputs.
30 – Silent Alerts
Use this command to disable the Alert fault tones. When enabled (default) the system
gives an alert tone and displays alerts on the keypad.
Y (Silent). The display shows alert messages for faults, but does not sound alert tones.
N (Audible). The display shows alert messages, and the system gives alert tones.
31 – Bus Cut Confimed/Unconfirmed Alarm
If an intruder cuts one or more of the bus cables then the control unit can report the event
as either a confirmed or an unconfirmed alarm. Use this command to select one of these
two options.
)
To ensure that this feature works correctly program Tampers as Tampers/Alarms to
“Tampers as Alarms”. See page 91.
Confirmed. The control unit reports a cut bus cable as a confirmed alarm.
Unconfirmed. The control unit reports a cut bus cable as an unconfirmed alarm.
Option 1-9-2: Choosing DD243 Configuration Options
(For defaults see page 133.)
1 – Confirmation On / Confirmation Off
Confirmation On – Select this option if you want to use the DD243 rules. Selecting the
option enables the panel to generate "confirmed" alarms.
A confirmed alarm occurs in a ward when at least two separate zones trigger within the
Confirmation time (page 62), providing the ward is set and the Entry Delay timer (page 61)
is not running. A confirmed alarm indicates that the alarm condition has a low probability
of being a false alarm. Generally, police will respond only to confirmed alarms. Note that
the second detector may be in a separate ward from the first detector. The control panel
reports the confirmed alarm for the ward containing the second detector.
If you do not select Confirmation On, all alarms are unconfirmed and require only one
zone to trigger in the alarm state (e.g. a Normal Alm zone while the system is set).
)
Please refer to the descriptions below for further information about the effects of
Confirmation On.
Confirmation Off – Selecting this option prevents confirmed alarms from being generated
and disables any output configured to follow a confirmed alarm.
2 – Sndrs on Unconf / Sndrs on Confirm
These options are relevant only if you have selected Confirmation On.
89
Engineer Menu 1-9
Engineering Manual
Sndrs on Unconf – The control unit starts the internal sounders (including keypad
sounders) immediately after an unconfirmed alarm. This behaviour is also used if you have
selected Confirmation Off.
Sndrs on Confirm – The control unit activates the internal sounders after a confirmed
alarm and any programmed bell delay.
)
The sounders operate without a confirmed alarm if the Entry Delay timer (page 61)
has been started and has expired.
3 – Bells on Unconf / Bells on Confirm
These options are relevant only if you have selected Confirmation On.
Bells on Unconf (default) – The control unit activates the external bell output immediately
after an unconfirmed alarm. This behaviour is also used if you have selected Confirmation
Off.
Bells on Confirm – The control unit activates the external bell output after a confirmed
alarm and any programmed bell delay.
)
The external bell output operates without a confirmed alarm if the Entry Delay
timer (page 61) has been started and has expired.
)
Bells and strobes can be disabled for selected wards using the Bell & Strobe
attribute (page 37).
)
Refer to the Bell Delay and Bell Duration notes on page 61.
4 – After Entry Yes / After Entry No
These options are relevant only if you have selected Confirmation On.
After Entry No (default) – Choose this option if you want to prevent confirmed alarms from
occurring at all after the Entry Delay timer has expired. Use this option to comply with
DD243:2002 paras 6.4.2, 6.4.3, 6.4.4 and 6.4.6.
After Entry Yes – Select this option if you want it to be possible for a confirmed alarm to
be generated once the Entry Delay timer (page 61) has expired. With this option selected,
if an intruder has started the Entry Delay timer (e.g. by breaking through the front door), a
confirmed alarm occurs only if either one or two further zones are triggered after the Entry
Delay timer expires. Only zone(s) that are not on the entry route are considered (i.e. zones
that have the Entry zone attribute are ignored).
Select the Confirm 2 Zones or Confirm 1 Zone option to choose whether one or two zone
activations are required after the Entry Delay timer (page 61) has expired.
5 – Ent KPD Lock Off / Ent KPD Lock On
These options are relevant only if you have selected Confirmation On.
Ent KPD Lock Off (default) – Users can unset the system from a keypad during the Entry
Delay time (page 61).
Ent KPD Lock On – Users cannot unset the system from a keypad during the Entry Delay
time (page 61). Select this option if you are installing a system to comply with DD243:2002
paras 6.4.5 and 6.4.6. The user must unset the system with a proximity tag (“Portable ACE”)
or the Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) unsets the system.
90
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-9
6 – Confirm 2 Zones / Confirm 1 Zone
These options are relevant only if you have selected Confirmation On and After Entry Yes.
Confirm 2 Zones (default) – A confirmed alarm is generated if the intruder activates two
additional zones after the Entry Delay timer (page 61) expires. If the control unit is in alarm
before the user starts the Entry Delay timer, only one subsequent zone violation is
required. Select this option if you are installing a DD243:2002 para 6.4.5 compliant system
and the user must unset the system with a proximity detector (“Portable ACE”).
Confirm 1 Zone – A confirmed alarm is generated if the intruder activates one additional
zone after the Entry Delay timer (page 61) expires. This option does not comply with
DD243:2002.
Option 1-9-3: Choosing EN50131 Configuration Options
(For defaults see page 133.)
01 – 4 Digit Codes / 6 Digit Codes
4 Digit Codes – All system user (access) codes are four digits.
6 Digit Codes – All user (access) codes are six digits. When using six-digit user codes, the
default engineer code is 123400 and the default manager code is 567800.
) You cannot change this setting if the engineer or default manager (user 01) code has been
changed, or any other user code has been set up in User option 2-4. Users can be deleted
using option 2-7-3-7 (page 131) and 2-7-3-8 (page 132).
02 – Internal Sounder / Local Sounder
Internal Sounder– If an alarm occurs while the Entry Delay timer (page 61) is running, both
the extension speaker and keypad sounders operate for 30 seconds. Once the 30-second
period has expired, a full alarm occurs (page 22), unless overridden by option 1-8-4 (page
83).
Local Sounder – Operation is the same as above, but external sounders and the strobe
also operate for the first 30 seconds.
03 – Instant Alarm / Delayed Alarm
Instant Alarm– Causes system and ward Alarm outputs (page 44 and 54) to activate
immediately a full alarm is generated by the Entry Delay timer (page 61) expiring.
Delayed Alarm – Causes system and ward Alarm outputs to be delayed by a further 30
seconds.
04 – Tampers As Alarm / Tampers As Tamps
Tampers As Alarm – If there is a tamper condition when the system is set, the control unit
will:
Communicate an alarm (CID code 130, SIA code BA) message to the Alarm Receiving
Centre (ARC). This depends on the communicator format you select if you choose to
employ the on-board modem.
Trigger system, ward and zone outputs of type "Alarm" and "Tamper Alarm" (or "Tamper").
91
Engineer Menu 1-9
Engineering Manual
Note: If an intruder cuts a network cable to an expander then this will trigger a confirmed
alarm (since, effectively, more than one zone has been tampered). See option 1-9-1-31 on
page 89.
If there is a zone tamper condition when the system is unset, the control unit will:
Transmit only tamper (CID code 137/SIA code TA) messages to the ARC.
Trigger system, ward and zone outputs of type "Tamper Alarm" (or "Tamper"). Please see
the following table.
Tampers As Tamps – If there is a tamper condition when the system is set or unset, the
control unit will:
Transmit only tamper (CID code 137/SIA code TA) messages to the ARC.
Trigger system, ward and zone outputs of type "Tamper Alarm" (or "Tamper")
Table 3. Effect of Tampers as Alarms on Output Operation
Tamper
Triggered
(Example)
Control unit
Keypad
Zone
Control unit
Keypad
Zone
Control unit
Keypad
Zone
Control unit
Keypad
Zone
Control
unit
Status
Unset
Unset
Unset
Set
Set
Set
Unset
Unset
Unset
Set
Set
Set
"Tampers
As"
System
Alarm
Tamper
OUTPUT TYPE
Ward
Alarm
Tamper
Alarm
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Tampers
Tampers
Tampers
Tampers
Tampers
Tampers
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Zone
Tamper
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
05 – Gen/fault: User / Eng
User – With this option selected, a user can override a general fault (page 48) when setting
the alarm system.
Eng – Prevents the alarm system from being set if there is a general fault (page 48).
06 – Telecommand Override
N – A user with a telecommand cannot set the system if there is a fault that would require
the user to acknowledge an alert at the keypad.
Y – A user can set the system with a telecommand.
Note that setting this option to “Y” is not sufficient to allow a user to set the system while
faults are present:
Option 05 Gen/fault must be set to “User” (default) to allow a telecommand to override
general faults.
Option 08 Mask Override must be set to “override” (default) to allow a telecommand to
override masking faults.
92
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-9
Option 12 AC Bypass must be set to “Always” (default) to allow a telecommand to override
Control unit Mains Fail, Remote PSU Mains Fail, PSU Power Zone Type alerts.
Option 14 LF Bypass must be set to “Always” (default) or “User” to allow a telecommand to
override PSTN faults.
Option 19 Battery Fault Override must be set to “Always” to allow a telecommand to
override battery faults.
07 – 4k4 = Masking
Masking – The control unit treats a resistance of 4k4 on a wired detector as a Masking
signal.
Fault – The control unit treats a resistance of 4k4 on a wired detector as Fault Signal.
Note: Compliance with PD6662/prEN51031-1:2006 Grade 3 requires that detectors report fault
conditions.
08 – Mask Override / Mask Inhibit
Mask Override – Users can set a ward that has a mask fault (page 26).
Mask Inhibit – Users cannot set any ward if there is a mask fault anywhere on the system
(page 26).
09 – Mask Unset Fault / Mask Unset Tamp / Mask Unset Alarm
Mask Unset Fault – The system will consider a masking condition (page 26) when the zone
is unset as a fault condition. Outputs programmed as Mask Fault (system output; page 49)
or Mask Flt (ward output; page 57) will activate.
Mask Unset Tamp – The system will consider a masking condition when the zone is unset
as a tamper condition. Outputs programmed as Mask Tamper (system output; page 49 or
Mask Tamp (ward output; page 57) will activate.
Mask Unset Alarm – The system will consider a masking condition when the zone is unset
as an alarm condition. Outputs programmed as Mask Alarm will also activate.
10 – Mask Set Fault / Mask Set Tamper / Mask Set Alarm
Mask Set Fault – The system will consider a masking condition (page 26) when the zone is
set as a fault condition. Outputs programmed as Mask Fault (system output; page 49) or
Mask Flt (ward output; page 57) will activate.
Mask Set Tamper – The system will consider a masking condition when the zone is set as a
tamper condition. Outputs programmed as Mask Tamper (system output; page 49 or
Mask Tamp (ward output; page 57) will activate.
Mask Set Alarm – The system considers a masking condition when the zone is set as an
alarm. Outputs programmed as Mask Alarm will also activate.
11 – AC Fail:No Reset / User / Engineer
No Reset – An AC Mains Fault alert will exist while the mains supply is switched off, but
will automatically disappear when the mains is restored. The control unit monitors its own
power supply, any remote PSU connected to a network, and any PSU reporting back to the
control unit by means of a zone with type PSU Power. No resetting of the alert is required.
93
Engineer Menu 1-9
)
Engineering Manual
The AC Off Delay timer (page 63) determines how long the mains must be off
before the system generates an alert.
User – An alert generated by a mains failure will require a normal user reset.
Engineer – An alert generated by a mains failure will require an engineer or remote reset.
12 – AC Bypass:Always / Healthy / Eng / Never
Always – With this option selected, an AC Mains Fault alert will not prevent a user from
being able to set the alarm system.
Healthy – Allows a user to override an AC fail alert and set the system, but only if mains is
present.
Never – Prevents the alarm system from being set if there is an AC fail alert that needs to
be reset. If the AC Fail option is set to Engineer, the system will be able to be set only after
the alert is reset by an engineer or remote reset.
13 – Line Fail:No Rst / User / Eng
No Rst – A line fault (e.g. no dial tone present) detected by the on-board modem or by an
external communicator will cause an alert to be generated, but the alert will disappear
when the line is restored. No resetting of the alert will be required.
The on-board modem can generate a "PSTN Line Fault" only if communications from the
on-board modem to an Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) has been enabled (see page 110).
An external communicator must connect to the LINE FLT input of the panel to signal a line
fault. The line fault alert is "ATE L.F. Single" or "ATE L.F. All" (see page 49).
User – An alert generated by a line fault will require a normal user reset.
Engineer – An alert generated by a line fault will require an engineer or remote reset.
14 – LF Bypass:Always / User / Eng
Always – With this option selected, an PSTN Line Fault alert will not prevent a user from
being able to set the alarm system.
User – Allows a user to override an PSTN Line Fault alert and set the system, but only if
there is no line fault.
Eng – Prevents the alarm system from being set if there is a PSTN Line Fault alert that
needs to be reset. If the Line Fail option is set to Eng, the system will be able to be set only
after the alert is reset by an engineer or remote reset.
15 – Supervision Fail Alert
Alert – The control unit displays a supervision failure alert.
Alarm – The control unit starts an intruder alarm
Tamper – The control unit starts a tamper alarm
The control unit also operates any outputs programmed as Supervision Failure.
16 – Reset Supervision Engineer/User
Reset when healthy – The control unit clears a supervision failure if none of the radio
zones allocated to the ward have a supervision failure.
94
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 1-9
User Reset – A user can reset a supervision failure by entering their access code at a
keypad.
Engineer or Remote Reset – The engineer must reset a supervision failure by entering their
access code at a keypad, or remotely.
17 – Reset Jamming Engineer/User
Always – The control unit clears a jamming alert if the MRNode detects that the jamming
has stopped.
User Reset – A user can reset a jamming alert by entering their access code at a keypad.
Engineer or Remote Reset – The engineer must reset a jamming alert by entering their
access code at a keypad, or remotely.
18 – Battery Fault Alert Reset
Auto – The control unit clears the alert when it detects that the panel battery is healthy.
User – The control unit clears the alert when an end user enters their code, provided the
panel’s battery is healthy.
Engineer – The control unit clears the alert when either the engineer enters their code at
the keypad, or performs a remote reset, provided the panel’s battery is healthy.
19 – Battery Low Alert Override When Setting
This option decides whether the user can carry on setting the system when there is an
alert caused by a battery fault at the control unit or a remote power supply.
Never – The control unit will not allow users to set the system from a keypad.
Healthy – If there has been an alert, but the batteries are all healthy at the time the user
tries to set the system from the keypad then the control unit asks the user if they wish to
proceed. The user can abort setting or carry on. If the user carries on with setting then the
control unit logs a “set with battery fault” event.
If the batteries are not healthy when the user tries to set the system, then the control unit
will not allow the system to set.
Always – If the user tries to set the system from the keypad, then the control unit will ask
the user if they wish to proceed. The user can continue setting or abort. If the user
continues setting then the control unit logs a “set with battery fault” event.
20 – Status Display
This option decides whether or not the keypads shows the system set status.
Never – The keypads show the set/unset status only after a user has entered their access
code. The control unit removes the status information as soon as the control unit finishes
setting a ward.
Timed – The keypads display the set/unset status of the system for a programmed number
of seconds after the control unit has finished setting a ward. To program the length of
time that setting status is visible use Option 1 - 5 - 2: - 30 (see page 66).
Always – The keypad always shows the set/unset status of the system.
95
Engineer Menu 1-9
Engineering Manual
21 - Mask As General Fault
Use this option to select whether the control unit treats a masking event while the system
is unset as a general fault or not.
No – Masking while unset does not generate a general fault.
Yes – Masking while unset does generate a general fault.
Option 1-0: Going to User Menu 1
This option allows you to access User menu 1. For details of the options in this menu, please
refer to the Manager's Manual.
) You can use user option 1-4 to change the engineer code.
) Some options are not available to an engineer.
96
Chapter 4: Using Engineer Menu 2
Introduction
Engineer menu 2 contains the options shown in the following flowchart.
Engineer Level 2
Press [ENT]or[1]
[
Eng 2 Menu 1
View Zones
Use | or ¬ to scroll through options,
or press hot key (1-8)
|
Eng 2 Menu 2
Time and Date
|
Eng 2 Menu 3
Volume Control
|
Eng 2 Menu 4
Change Passcode
|
Eng 2 Menu 5
Communications
|
Eng 2 Menu 6
Alter Shunt Grps
|
Eng 2 Menu 7
Built In Tests
|
Eng 2 Menu 8
Log Functions
|
Engineer Menu 2
97
Engineer Menu 2-1
Engineering Manual
Option 2-1: Viewing Zone Status
Eng 2 Menu 1
View Zones
[
1. SELECT ZONE
Zone text
Zone number
Panel Zone 1
0001 Healthy
Zone status
(A=Activity, zone has operated with the
last seven unset periods. See note 1.)
Network: device, zone
e.g. r
1:011, Remote
1011 Healthy
To select zone:
· Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
Pressr to choose a zone on the next network
(e.g. to change 0001 to 1001) or,
Enter zone number (e.g. 2001 )
Note 2:
Press] to view zone resistance (wired FSL zones only)
r
PIR
2001 Healthy
Radio zone status:
current signal strength (lowest previous)
Supervision status
(H=healthy, W=warning, F=failed)
Battery status
(H=healthy. L=low)
[
PIR
9(9) Sup-H Bat-H
]
Press] when you have finished.
Note 3:
When you press] the control unit leaves the
previous lowest signal strength unchanged.
If you press[ at this point the control unit
clears the previous lowest signal strength and
updates it with the current signal strength.
Note 1:
You must assign the Activity attribute to a zone
(option 1-1) to make the control panel monitor it.
This option enables you to determine the status of each zone. The zone status conditions and
resistance are shown in the following table for an FSL zone without masking (page 26):
Table 4. Zone Status Conditions and Resistsance for FSL Zones
Condition
FSL Resistor Configuration Selected (page 32)
4K7/2K2
1K0/1K0
4K7/4K7
2K2/2K2
Healthy
2.2 KΩ ± 20%
1.0 KΩ ± 20%
4.7 KΩ ± 20%
2.2 KΩ ± 20%
Active
6.9 KΩ ± 20%
2.0 KΩ ± 20%
9.4 KΩ ± 20%
4.4 KΩ ± 20%
Tamper
>6.9 KΩ +20%
>2.0 KΩ +20%
>9.4 KΩ +20%
>4.4 KΩ +20%
Shorted
<2.2 KΩ - 20%
<1.0 KΩ - 20%
<4.7 KΩ - 20%
<2.2 KΩ - 20%
For an FSL zone with masking:
Healthy = 2.2 KΩ ± 20%
Active = 6.9 KΩ ± 20%
Masked = 4.4 KΩ ± 20%, or 9.1 KΩ ±20%
Tamper = <2.2 KΩ - 20%, or >9.1 KΩ +20%
For double-pole zone:
Healthy = Contacts close circuited and tamper contacts closed circuited
Active = Contacts open circuited and tamper contacts closed circuited
98
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-1
Tamper = Tamper contact open circuited
For a radio zone:
Healthy = The detector has not signalled an alarm, but is in working order.
Active = The detector has signalled an alarm.
Tampered = The detector has signalled a tamper alarm.
Current signal strength 1 to 9, where 1 is the lowest, Previous lowest signal strength in
brackets.
Supervision status:
Sup-H = supervision healthy
Sup-W = Supervision warning
Sup-F = Supervision failed
Battery status:
Batt-H = Battery healthy
Batt-L = Battery low.
99
Engineer Menu 2-2
Engineering Manual
Option 2-2: Specifying the Time and Date
Eng
2 Menu 2
1234567890123456
Time
and Date
1234567890123456
[
Time and Date
Set Time
e.g. |
Time and Date
Set Date
1. SELECT TIME/DATE
OPTION
1
2
To select option:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Enter option hot key
[
Current Date :20/01/05
2. CHANGE DATE/
TIME
Enter date or time value followed by
[ to save changes and c ontinue.
Use this option to make sure that the system date and time are correct.
) The system automatically advances/retards the time by one hour at 1am GMT on the
standard summer/winter changeover dates.
1 – Set Time
The time is displayed in a 24-hour format on all keypads and is also used to time stamp
events in the system log (User option 2-9; see the Manager's Manual).
2 – Set System Date
The system date is displayed on keypads. it is also used to provide date stamps for events
in the system log.
100
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-3
Option 2-3: Setting the Loudspeaker Volume Level
Eng 2 Menu 3
Volume Control
[
Shows volume level
(sounder operates)
1. SET VOLUME LEVEL
Volume Control
>>
To set volume level:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Enter volume level (e.g. 2)
e.g. ¬
Volume Control
>
Press [ to save changes and continue
[
This option allows you to adjust the volume level of the extension loudspeaker connected to the
control panel, or to disable it completely.
) It does not affect the keypad volume, but the keypad will sound when changing the
volume.
Option 2-4: Changing Your Passcode and Name
Eng 2 Menu 4
Change Passcode
[
Engineer Code
Code
1
To select whether to change engineer
passcode or name:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1or 2)
Enter new code..
---Enter new code,
then press [
Engineer
^ngineer Name
Use the keys similar to the text keys
on a mobile phone (see Appendix
A). Press | or ¬ to move cursor to
next charac ter. Press [ to save
changes and continue
This option allows you to change your engineer code and name.
The engineer name is displayed against appropriate entries in the system log (page 138).
The code is either four or six digits, depending on whether the 4 Digit Codes or 6 Digit Codes
configuration option is selected (page 91). The default code is 1234 if four-digit codes are used,
and 123400 if six-digit codes are used.
) To set the engineer code to the default, open the panel lid, silence the tamper alarm by
entering a user code, then with power still applied to the PCB, momentarily short the
"Factory Restart" pins on the PCB.
101
Engineer Menu 2-5
Engineering Manual
Option 2-5: Setting Up Communications
Eng 2 Menu 5
Communications
[
Communication
Downloader
1
Use | or ¬ to scroll through options,
or press hot key (1-4)
|
Communication
DigiCom
2
|
Communication 3
Start CallBack
|
Communication
RS232 Options
4
|
The options in the Communication menu are described next.
Option 2-5-1: Setting Up the Downloader Options
Communication
Downloader
1
Use | or ¬ to scroll through options,
or press hot key (1-5)
[
Downloader
Password
1
|
Downloader
Site ID
2
|
Downloader
Access Mode
3
|
Downloader
4
Edit Call Nos.
|
Downloader
Modem Options
5
|
The options in the Downloader menu relate to communications via the on-board modem or
USB port with a remote PC that is running the Downloader software. The options in the
Downloader menu are described next. (For defaults see page 133.)
102
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-5
Option 2-5-1-1 – Defining the Downloader Password
Downloader
Password
Shows current
setting (if defined)
1
[
ExistingPassword
^Password
Enter password
NewPassword
Password ^
Press [ to save changes
and continue
[
) The first connection from Downloader is accepted without first having to set up the
password or Site ID at the panel. During this first connection, the Site ID and password are
set up automatically by Downloader. There is therefore not normally a need to use this
option.
This option allows you to specify the password used by Downloader to connect to the panel.
The password is used if Downloader connects through the on-board modem (if fitted) or USB
port. The password can be up to 16 characters long and provides a means of security to prevent
unauthorised communications with the panel from a computer running the Downloader
software.
The password specified in the site profile at the Downloader software must match the password
that is stored in the control panel.
Refer to page 151 for details of the keys to use to enter or change the password.
Option 2-5-1-2 – Defining the Site Identification
Downloader
Site ID
Shows current
setting (if defined)
2
[
1234
^Site ID
Enter ID
2345
Si^e ID
[
Press [ to save changes
and continue
This option allows you to specify a site identification for the panel (use no more than 12
characters). When calling in via the on-board modem (if fitted) or USB port, the Downloader
software must supply the same site ID as defined at the control panel before the connection is
accepted. The site ID also enables the Downloader software to obtain the correct site profile
when the control panel rings the remote PC.
Refer to page 151 for details of the keys to use to enter the site ID. See also the note in the
previous section (Downloader Password).
103
Engineer Menu 2-5
Engineering Manual
Option 2-5-1-3 – Defining the Access Mode
Downloader
Access Mode
3
[
1. SELECT ACCESS
MODE
Shows current setting
Access Mode
Off
1
e.g. |
Access Mode
2
Secure Call Back
[
To select the access mode:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1-3)
Press [ to save changes and continue
This option determines how the control panel responds to incoming calls from the Downloader
software via the on-board modem. Once the Downloader software is connected, it is able to
upload data and change settings.
) Providing option 2 or 3 is selected, Downloader can connect, even if an engineer or user is
using the system.
Choose one of the following options:
1 – Off
Select this option to prevent the panel from answering incoming calls. A manual call can
be made using option 2-5-3 (page 119) or User option 2-6-1.
2 – Secure Call Back
With this option selected, when the Downloader software has called the panel and
supplied the correct password, the panel immediately hangs up the telephone line and
calls back the Downloader software. This is a more secure method of establishing a link
than the Unattended option, since the Downloader software supplies the call-back ID,
which the panel uses to determine the telephone number to call back.
3 – Unattended
Select this option if you want the Downloader software to be allowed full access to the
control panel immediately after supplying the correct password.
104
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-5
Option 2-5-1-4: – Editing Call-Back Numbers
Downloader
4
1234567890123456
Edit
Call Nos.
1234567890123456
[
Shows c urrent
number (if defined)
Edit Call No.
01594545400
e.g. |
Edit Call No.
01694130200
1. SELECT CALL BACK
NUMBER
1
2
To select the call-back number:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1-4)
[
01694130200
^dit Call No.
2. ENTER TELEPHONE
NUMBER
2
Enter the telephone number
01694130201
Edit Call ^o.
[
Pressing the r key toggles between
deleting the digit above the c ursor and
adding a c omma (to indic ate a pause)
2
Press [ to save changes and continue
This option allows you to define or edit up to eight telephone numbers for communication with
a PC running the Downloader software via the on-board modem.
Using the r key, you can insert a 4-second pause between any two digits of the telephone
number (the pause is indicated by a comma). This may be necessary if the telephone system or
exchange mis-dials using the normal dialling speed of the control panel. If a delay is necessary,
it is normally placed either before the first digit (to give time to connect to the line), or after the
first digit that is used to obtain an outside line.
) ARC telephone numbers can be defined by option 2-5-2-2 (page 116)
105
Engineer Menu 2-5
Engineering Manual
Option 2-5-1-5 – Choosing the Modem Options
Downloader
5
1234567890123456
Modem
Options
1234567890123456
[
1. SELECT MODEM
OPTION
Modem Options 1
Rings To Answer
e.g. |
Modem Options
Baud Rate
2
To select modem options:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1-3)
[
Shows current setting
Baud Rate
2400
|
Baud Rate
300
[
2. IF REQUIRED,
CHANGE SETTING
2
1
To select the required setting:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key
Press [ to save changes and continue
The following options are available:
1 – Rings to Answer
Specifies the number of rings before the panel answers an incoming call via the on-board
modem.
Note: If you plan to connect the control unit to a private branch exchange (PBX) then make sure
that Rings to Answer is set to at least “5”. This setting ensures that the control unit can
detect incoming calls from the PBX correctly.
2 – Baud Rate
This is the baud rate used for communications over the telephone line to the Downloader
software. A setting of 1200 baud is normally used.
3 – Ans Phone Defeat
This option is useful if the telephone line is shared with an automatic telephone answering
machine (to record voice messages). If you select Enabled, the panel listens for a single
ring. If there is another call within 30 seconds, the panel assumes that the call is from
Downloader and answers the call immediately, thereby preventing the answering machine
from answering the call. The Rings to Answer option is not relevant when Answer Phone
Defeat is enabled.
Option 2-5-1-6 Remote Service
The following options are available (for defaults see page 133.):
1 – Enable?
This option allows you enable or disable remote service calls. Press | or ¬ to select either of
the following:
106
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-5
No – The control unit does not make any service calls.
Yes – The control unit makes services calls as programmed by the options described below.
2 – Call Number
Use this option to select one of the 8 telephone numbers programmed using Option 2-5-1-4.
This will be the telephone number that the control unit calls when starting a service call.
3 – Time Period
On the day that a service call is due, there may be times when it is inconvenient for the control
unit to call, or for the service centre to receive calls. Use this option to define a time window. If
the control unit needs to make repeated attempts to complete a service call, then these
attempts all take place with this time window. The start and end times of the window must be
on the same day.
When you select this option the screen immediately displays the Start Time. Key in the start time
in hours and minutes. Use the 24 hour clock. Press [ to finish.
The screen then displays the End Time. Key in the end time in hours and minutes. The end time
must be later than the start time. Use the 24 hour clock. Press [ to finish.
4 – Next Service
Use this option to specify the day and time of the next service call. To prevent all control units
making service calls at the same time, make sure each control unit has a different date and/or
time.
When you select this option the screen immediately displays the Service time. Key in the
preferred time of day for the service call. Use the 24 hour clock. Press [ to finish.
The screen then displays the Service Date. Key in the preferred date for the service call. Press [
to finish.
Note: The control unit may change this date if it has to make several attempts to connect to
Downloader.
5 – Interval
Set the time period between service calls in days. You can select the frequency of service calls
from between one a day to one every 365 days.
When you select this command the screen shows the current value of the Interval in days.
Key in the number of days you require. Use leading zeroes for day numbers under 100. (You can
also press | or ¬ to increase or decrease the number of days one at a time.) Press [ to finish.
6 – Call Back
There are two methods of connecting a service call from the control unit: either “direct in” or
“call-back”.
For a “direct-in” call, the control unit simply dials the specified number, identifies itself to the
service centre, and then waits for commands from the Downloader.
107
Engineer Menu 2-5
Engineering Manual
For a “call-back” call, the control unit calls the service centre, identifies itself using a Panel Site
ID, and then tells the service centre to call the control unit. The service centre then calls the
control unit and establishes a connection.
“Call-back” calls only work on scheduled remote service calls. If you start a manual service call
then the PC will not “call-back” to the panel.
The options available in this command are:
Disabled – The control unit dials the telephone number selected in option 2-5-1-6-2 and tries
to establish a “direct-in” call.
Enabled – The control unit dials the telephone number selected in option 2-5-1-6-2 and tries
to establish a “call-back” call.
Note: To use “call-back” set option 2-5-1-3 (Access Mode) to “unattended”.
When you select this command the screen shows the currently selected Call-back option. Either:
press 1 to select Disabled or 2 to select Enabled. (You can also select one or other option by
pressing | or ¬ .) Press [ to finish.
7 – Walk Test Alerts
Use this option to provide a regular reminder to the user to carry out a walk test. When this
option is enabled, the control unit produces an alert on the keypad display at the programmed
day and time, and logs the fact that it has given an alert. The user can acknowledge the alert
and if desired carry out a walk test. The user can ignore the alert and still set the system.
When you select this option, the screen shows the current value. Either:
Press 8 to disable Walk Test Alerts, or:
Press 1 to 7 followed by [ to select Sunday to Saturday as the day of the week on which the
reminder will appear (you cannot select more than one day in the week).
When the top line of the display shows “Walk Test Alerts”, key in the time of day at which you
want the reminder to appear (use the 24 hour clock). Press [ to finish.
108
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-5
Option 2-5-2: – Setting Up the DigiCom
Communication
DigiCom
2
Use | or ¬ to scroll through option s,
or press hot key (1-6)
[
DigiCom
Comms Format
1
|
DigiCom
ARC No.
2
|
DigiCom
3
Account Numbers
|
DigiCom
Dialling Mode
4
|
DigiCom
Restores
5
|
DigiCom
6
CID/SIA Reports
|
DigiCom
FF Channels
7
|
DigiCom
Test Call
8
|
DigiCom
Line Fault
9
|
The options in the DigiCom menu determine the settings for communications with an Alarm
Receiving Centre (ARC) via the on-board modem. The options in the DigiCom menu are
described next.
109
Engineer Menu 2-5
Engineering Manual
Option 2-5-2-1 – Specifying the Communications Format
DigiCom
Comms Format
1
[
1. SELECT THE
COMMS FORMAT
Shows current setting
Comms Format
Disabled
1
e.g. |
Comms Format
Fast Format
[
2
To select the comms form at:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key
Press [ to save changes and c ontinue
Use this option to specify the communications format in which to send data to the ARC. Contact
the Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC)for the option that you should use. The following options are
available:
1 – Disabled
This option disables communications to the ARC. This option must be selected if a phone
line is not connected to the panel, otherwise "PSTN Line Fault" alerts will be generated.
2 – Fast Format
This is Scancom Fast Format; the format most widely used in the UK. When using the Fast
Format, each message transmitted to the ARC consists of the following:
A 4-digit or 6-digit account number. The account number is 1 for system, zone, user or
group output types. For ward output types, the account number is 1 for ward 1
events, 2 for ward 2 events, etc.
8 or 16 channels of data, as determined by option 2-5-2-7 (page 119). Each channel
communicates the status of an output, as programmed using the Digi On Board
outputs (page 41). The value of the channel can be:
1 = new alarm and not previously reported
2 = status of output is open/unset (Certain output types indicate an open/closed or
set/unset status, such as System Set, System Full Set and System Open; see page 44.
A value of 2 is used when the output indicates an unset status.)
3 = alarm restored and not previously reported
4 = status of output is closed/set (Similar to 2, but indicates the opposite status.)
5 = not in alarm
6 = in alarm but previously reported
A test signal.
)
110
The Restore Signals option in Engineer 2-5-2-5 (page 118) determines whether
restore messages are sent to the ARC.
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-5
3 – Contact ID
The Contact ID format automatically transmits data from the event log to the Alarm
Receiving Centre (ARC). Examples of messages that use the Contact ID format are:
Example 1 - 1234 18 1137 01 015 2
1234 is the account number, as specified in option 2-5-2-3 (page 117).
18 is the message type used to identify the message as Contact ID.
1137 is the event qualifier for a new event (1), followed by the event code for a system
tamper alarm (137).
01 is the ward number.
015 is the zone number.
2 is the checksum value, which the ARC needs to verify to confirm a valid message has
been received.
Example 2 - 1234 18 3137 01 015 F
The only difference between this and the first example, is the event qualifier of 3 to
indicate a restore of a system tamper alarm, and the checksum value.
)
The Restore Signals option in Engineer 2-5-2-5 (page 118) determines whether
restore messages are sent to the ARC.
)
The Tampers As Alarm/Tamps option in Engineer 1-9-3 (page 91) determines
whether tamper conditions are sent as event code 130 or 137.
Table 5 (see page 112) shows the events that are transmitted to the ARC, depending on
the reporting level set in option 2-5-2-6 (page 119).
4 to 7 – SIA 1, SIA 2, SIA 3 and Extended SIA 3
The SIA formats automatically transmit data from the event log to the ARC. The four SIA
formats differ in the amount of data transmitted with each message:
SIA1 format is:
#AAAAAA|NCCcc
SIA2 format is:
#AAAAAA|Nidnnn/rinn/CCcc
SIA3 format is:
#AAAAAA|Ntihh:mm/idnnn/rinn/CCcc
#AAAAAA|AS
Extended SIA 3 format is: #AAAAAA|Ntihh:mm/idnnn/rinn/CCcc/AS
Where:
AAAAAA = 6-digit programmable account code (e.g. 123456), as specified in option 2-52-3 (page 117).
N = New Event (always N).
tihh:mm/ = time (e.g. ti10:23/).
idnnn/ = user number, if applicable; otherwise not sent (e.g. id123/ or id6/).
rinn/ = ward no. (e.g. ri12/ or ri3).
111
Engineer Menu 2-5
Engineering Manual
CC = event code (e.g. FA = Fire Alarm).
cc = zone or keypad number, if applicable; otherwise not sent (e.g. 23 or 5).
AS = text description of event.
For example, if there is a fire alarm on zone 2 of ward 6 at 10:15 (ward 6 account number
is 10), the message would be:
SIA1:
#000010|NFA2
SIA2:
#000010|NFA2/ri6
SIA3:
#000010|Nti10:15/FA2/ri6
#000010|AFire Zone 6
Extended SIA3: #000010|Nti10:15/FA2/ri6/AFire Zone 6
Table 5 (see page 112) shows the events that are transmitted to the ARC, depending on
the reporting level set in option 2-5-2-6 (page 119).
)
A Custom option can be selected in option 2-5-2-6; this allows the events
transmitted to be selected using Downloader.
Table 5. CID and SIA Event Codes
Note: In this table “#” represents a digit.
Log Message/Event
### NODE R# LOST
### NODE R# TAMP
#### OMITTED
#:## BAT MISSING
#:## BAT RESTORE
#:## BATT LOW
#:## DEVICE LOST
#:## LEC LOST
#:## LEC TAMPER
#:## MAINS FAIL
#:## MAINS OK
#:## MSNODE FUSE
#:## MSNODE LOST
#:## MSNODE TAMP
#:## NODE FUSE
#:## NODE LOST
#:## NODE TAMPER
#:## PSU FUSE
#:## PSU TAMP
#:## RADIO FUSE
#:## RADIO TAMP
#:## REM LOST
#:## REM TAMPER
#:## RF JAMMED
24H RESTORE ####
24Hr ALARM ####
112
SIA
CODE
TA
TA
BB
YM
YR
YT
TA
TA
TA
AT
AR
YP
TA
TA
YP
TA
TA
YP
TA
YP
TA
TA
TA
XQ
BR
BA
CID
CODE
137
137
573
311
311
311
137
137
137
301
301
Basic
Y
Y
Y
137
137
Y
Y
137
137
Y
Y
137
Y
137
137
137
380
130
130
Y
Y
Y
Summary
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Intermediate
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Full
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Engineering Manual
Log Message/Event
ALARM ####
ATE L.F. ALL
ATE L.F. RESTORE
ATE L.F. SINGLE
AUTOSET 1 OFF
AUTOSET 1 ON
AUTOSET 2 OFF
AUTOSET 2 ON
AUTOSET 3 OFF
AUTOSET 3 ON
AUX RESTORE ####
AUXILIARY ####
Auxiliary 1 Tamp
Auxiliary 2 Tamp
AUXILIARY FUSE
Battery Fault
BELL FUSE
BELL TAMP OMIT
CHANGE CODE ##
CHANGE TAG ##
CODE TAMPER
COMMS FAILED
COMMS TEST CALL
DATE CHANGED AT
DATE CHANGED TO
DEFAULT USER
DEFAULT USER ##
DEFERRED SET:DL DISCONNECT FL
DL DISCONNECT OK
DURESS CODE ##
ENG HW DEFAULTED
ENGINEER ARRIVES
ENGINEER DEPARTS
ENTRY TIME-OUT:EXT LINE FAULT
EXT LINE RESTORE
FAULT 4K4 ####
FIRE ALARM ####
FIRE RESET. ####
HI-SECURITY SET:
ID LOOP RESTORED
ID LOOP SHORTED
KEYPAD PANIC ###
LOCAL ON LINE
LOCKSET #### ON
LOCKSET #### OFF
LOCKSET WARD ON
Engineer Menu 2-5
SIA
CODE
BA
LT
LR
LT
OP
CL
OP
CL
OP
CL
YQ
UA
TA
TA
YP
YT
TA
BB
JV
JV
JA
YC
RP
JT
JT
JX
JV
CE
RU
RS
HA
JV
LB
LS
BA
LT
LR
IA
FA
FR
CL
TR
TA
PA
RB
CL
OP
CL
CID
CODE
130
351
351
351
401
401
401
401
401
401
150
137
137
311
137
573
461
461
461
350
602
625
625
Basic
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Intermediate
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Full
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Summary
Y
Y
Y
Y
461
412
412
121
461
627
628
130
351
351
389
110
110
401
137
137
123
412
409
409
409
Y
Y
Y
113
Engineer Menu 2-5
Log Message/Event
MASK ALRM S ####
MASK ALRM U ####
MASK FLT S ####
MASK FLT U ####
MASK TMP S ####
MASK TMP U ####
NETWORK # FUSE
NODE TAMP OMIT
NORM. REST. ####
OCCUPANCY SET
ON LINE TO #
PA ALARM #:##:#
PANEL BATT LOW
Panel Lid Tamper
PANEL MAINS OFF
PANEL MAINS ON
PANEL TAMP OMIT
PANIC ALARM ####
PANIC CODE ##
PANIC REST. ####
PNL BATT MISSING
PNL BATT RESTORE
PSTN FAULT
PSTN RESTORE
PSU BATT A ####
PSU BATT H ####
PSU FUSE A ####
PSU FUSE H ####
PSU PWR A ####
PSU PWR H ####
REARM ,OMIT ####
REARM SYSTEM
REM RESET PASSED
REM TAMPER
RESET WARDS:SET EXT L.FAULT
SET FAIL WARDS:SET GENERAL FLT
SET PSTN FAULT
SET PSU BATT FLT
SET PSU FUSE FLT
SET PSU PWR FLT
SET SUPER WARN:SET WARDS:SET WITH AC FAIL
SET WITH FLT 4K4
SET WITH MSK FLT
SET ZNS OMTTED:-
114
Engineering Manual
SIA
CODE
BT
BT
BT
BT
BT
BT
TA
BB
BR
CL
RB
PA
YT
TA
AT
AR
BB
PA
PA
PR
YM
YR
LT
LR
YP
YQ
YP
YQ
YP
YQ
BB
OR
OR
TA
OR
CL
EA
CL
CL
CL
CL
CL
BB
CL
CL
CL
CL
BB
CID
CODE
380
380
380
380
380
380
137
573
130
401
412
123
311
137
301
301
573
120
123
120
311
311
351
351
573
305
305
137
305
401
401
401
401
401
401
573
401
401
401
401
573
Basic
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Summary
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Intermediate
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Full
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Engineering Manual
Log Message/Event
SET ZNS SHNTED:SHUNT ZONE ####
SILENT PA ####
SILENT PA #:##:#
SUMMER CHANGED
SUMMER CHANGED
SUMMER TIME SET
TAMP ZONE ####
TAMP. REST. ####
TAMPER ####
TC #:##:# BAT LO
TC #:##:# BAT OK
TECHNICAL ####
TEST ZONE ####
TIME CHANGED AT
TIME CHANGED TO
TX #:##:# BAT LO
TX #:##:# BAT OK
TX #:##:# SUP FL
UNSET WARDS:USER ## DELETED
WARD CONFIRMED:WARDS LOCKED:WARDS UNLOCKED:WINTER CHANGED
WINTER CHANGED
WINTER TIME SET
Engineer Menu 2-5
SIA
CODE
BB
BB
HA
HA
JT
JT
JT
TA
TR
TA
YT
YR
UA
BB
JT
JT
YT
YR
BZ
OP
JX
BV
CL
OP
JT
JT
JT
CID
CODE
573
573
122
122
625
625
625
137
137
137
311
311
150
573
625
625
311
311
381
401
139
409
409
625
625
625
Basic
Y
Y
Y
Y
Summary
Y
Y
Y
Y
Intermediate
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Full
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
115
Engineer Menu 2-5
Engineering Manual
Option 2-5-2-2 – Specifying the ARC Number
DigiCom
2
1234567890123456
ARC
No.
1234567890123456
[
Shows current
number (if defined)
ARC Number
01594545400
e.g. |
ARC Number
01594545401
1. SELECT ARC NUMBER
1, 2 OR 3
1
2
To select the first, second or third
ARC number:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1-3)
[
2. ENTER ARC NUMBER
01594545401
^RC Number
2
Enter number
01594545402
ARC Number^
[
Pressing the r key toggles between
deleting the digit above the c ursor and
adding a c omma (to indic ate a pause)
2
Press [ to save changes and continue
Use this option to specify the telephone numbers of up to three Alarm Receiving Centres (ARC).
You can use the r key to insert a 4-second pause between any two digits of the telephone
number (see page 105 for further details).
Depending on the Dialling Mode setting (page 117), alarms can be communicated to more than
one ARC. Specify the ARC telephone numbers in order of priority (i.e. the ARC you want to use
most often should be ARC number 1).
116
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-5
Option 2-5-2-3 – Specifying the ARC Account Number
DigiCom
3
1234567890123456
Account
Numbers
1234567890123456
[
Account No.
1234
e.g. |
Account No.
2345
1. SELECT ACCOUNT
NUMBER 1-8
1
2
To select the account number:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key
[
2345
^ccount No.
2. ENTER ACCOUNT
NUMBER
2
You can delete a digit by positioning
the c ursor under the digit and
pressing the r key.
Enter number
2346
Acc^unt No.
2
[
Press [ to save changes and continue
Use this option to specify the Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) account number that the panel
should provide when calling the ARC. You can enter any character from the keypad (see
Appendix A).
Option 2-5-2-4 – Specifying the Dialling Mode
DigiCom
4
1234567890123456
Dialling
Mode
1234567890123456
[
1. SELECT DIALLING MODE
Dialling Mode
Consecutive
1
e.g. |
Dialling Mode
Alternate
[
2
To select option:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1-3)
Press [ to save changes and continue
Choose one of the following:
1 – Consecutive
If you have defined more than one ARC (page 116), the panel will attempt to contact the
first ARC when an alarm occurs. If there is no connection, the panel attempts again several
times, with a fixed delay between each attempt. If there is no connection, the panel tries to
contact the second ARC in the same manner. If there is no connection with the second
ARC, the panel tries to contact the final ARC before closing communication.
117
Engineer Menu 2-5
Engineering Manual
2 – Alternate
This is similar to the Consecutive option, but the panel attempts to connect to each ARC
only once before attempting the next. Once the last number has been attempted, the
system returns to the first and the sequence continues.
3 – All
With this option selected, the panel sends the alarm to all defined ARCs. The panel will
continue to attempt a connection to each ARC until the alarm has been sent to all of them.
Each telephone number is attempted a maximum of 15 times.
)
This option is applicable only if Fast Format is used (page 110). If SIA or Contact ID
is used, selecting All results in the same operation as the Alternate option.
Option 2 - 5 - 2 - 5: Configuring Restores
DigiCom-1
Restores
5
[
1. SELECT RES
TORES
Restores
Enable
2
To enable/disable restore s
· Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
· Press the hot key
e.g. |
Restores
Disable
[
1
Press[ to save changes and continue
You can use this option to specify whether or not to send "restore" messages to the ARC:
1 – Restore Signals Enabled
If you enable restores, the control unit sends both alarm and restore signals to the ARC.
For example, for a normal zone alarm, a restore message would indicate that the alarm has
been reset (this is not the same event as silencing the external sounders).
2 – Restore Signals Disabled
If you disable restores, the control unit will send alarm messages to the ARC, but will not
send restore messages.
118
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-5
Option 2-5-2-6 – CID/SIA Reports
DigiCom
6
1234567890123456
CID/SIA
Reports
1234567890123456
[
1. SELECT REPORTING
LEVEL
CID/SIA Report 1
Full
e.g. |
CID/SID Report 2
Intermediate
[
To select option:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1-5)
Press [ to save changes and continue
If you are using an Contact ID or SIA communications format, choose Full, Intermediate,
Summary, Basic or Custom to specify the types of events to transmit to the ARC. Please refer to
page 112 for further information. You should use the Custom option only if you have used the
Downloader software to specify which events to communicate to the ARC.
Option 2-5-2-7: FF Channels
Choose whether to transmit 8 or 16 channels of data if using the Fast Format. The data
transmitted by each channel is determined by Option 1 - 4: Digi On Board Outputs
programming.
Option 2-5-2-8: Test Call
You can use this option to make the control unit start a test call immediately. The control unit
calls the ARC numbers using the call format you have set up.
Option 2-5-2-9: Line Fault
You can use this option to enable or disable monitoring of line faults on the telephone line to
the ARC. Enabling line fault monitoring activates outputs of type PSTN Line Fault when a line
fault occurs.
Option 2-5-3: Starting a Call Back
You can use this option to initiate a connection over the telephone line to a remote site that is
running the Downloader software. Once the communication link is established, the remote site
can upload data and change settings in the control unit.
Press | or ¬ to choose one of eight call-back numbers (telephone numbers) to call and press
[. (Use engineer option 2-5-1-4 set up the call-back numbers.)
An alternative method of making a connection between the control unit and Downloader
PC is to set the access mode to Unattended or Secure Call Back. This allows the panel
to respond to calls that have originated from the remote site.
Once you have selected the telephone number to use press | or ¬, or key a number between 1
and 5 to select one of the following options:
119
Engineer Menu 2-5
Engineering Manual
Option 2-5-3-1 – Connect
Establish a connection with the PC running Downloader, but take no further action. (The
specific account for the control unit must be open on Downloader before you start the
call.)
Option 2-5-3-2 – Upload from PC*
Once connected, Downloader sends configuration data to the control unit, and then drops
the connection.
Option 2-5-3-3 – Download to PC*
Once connected, the control unit sends configuration data to Downloader, and then drops
the connection.
Option 2-5-3-4 – Diagnostic*
Once connected, Downloader performs a simple remote service check and then drops the
connection. Downloader ignores any log event data or configuration data. The control unit
does NOT change the next remote service date and time.
Option 2-5-3-5 – Remote Service*
Once connected, Downloader performs the full remote service call and then drops the
connection.
*Note: For options 2 to 5, Downloader must have all accounts closed before you start the call.
Option 2-5-4: Setting Up the RS232 Port
Option 2-5-4-1: Setting the Baud Rate
Communication
RS232 Options
4
[
RS232 Options
RS232 Baud
1
1. SELECT BAUD RATE
[
RS232 Baud
38400
7
e.g. |
RS232 Baud
600
1
To select the baud rate:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Enter hot key (1-7)
[
This option allows you to set the baud rate for the serial (RS232) port.
) This option is available for M2000 panel only.
) Use a baud rate of 38400 when using the Downloader software.
) Use a baud rate of 9600 when using an IRIS IP dialer for Downloader.
120
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-5
Option 2-5-4-2: Enabling the WebWayOne Interface
The Remote Modem option is used to enable the panel to interface with WebWayOne IP
communicators. Do not change the default setting of "Disable" without being instructed by your
Alarm Transmission System (ATS) supplier.
121
Engineer Menu 2-6
Engineering Manual
Option 2-6: Setting Up Shunt Groups
Eng 2 Menu 6
Alter Shunt Grps
[
1. SELECT SHUNT
GROUP
Edit Shunt Grps
Group
01
e.g. |
Edit Shunt Grps
Group
02
X
To select the shunt group:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Enter the shunt group number (e.g. 02)
[
2. SELECT THE ZONE
NUMBER TO EDIT
There can be up to 8
zones in the shunt group
Shows the zone number
alloc ated to this slot in the
group. "----" means no zone
number allocated
Group 02 Zone >1
Zone ---e.g. |
Group 02 Zone >2
Zone ----
To view the next zone number
in the shunt group:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1-8)
If a zone number is displayed, you can remove the
zone from the group by pressing r, followed by ]
(or | or ¬) while "> " is displayed on the top line.
3. SPECIFY THE ZONE
NUMBER
[
Group 02 Zone 2
Zone >0001
e.g. |
Group 02 Zone 2
Zone >0002
[
To specify the zone number to include in
the shunt group:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press r to c hoose zone on next network
(e.g. to change 0001 to 1001), or
Enter zone number (e.g. 0002)
Press [ to save changes and continue
Shunt groups provide a simple way to isolate zones until further notice.
Each shunt group can contain up to eight zones, and each group can be allocated to a user of
type "Shunt" (User option 2-4; see the Manager's Manual). When the user's code is first entered,
the zones are isolated. When the code is entered again, they are reinstated.
Although 24-hour zones are most commonly isolated, any zone can be assigned to a shunt
group.
) Any zone selected must have the Shuntable attribute (page 29).
) Reinstating zones may start the exit timer, depending on whether Unshunt, No Exit or
Unshunt & Exit is selected (page 87).
122
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-7
Option 2-7: Running Built-in Tests
Eng 2 Menu 7
Built In Tests
[
Built In Tests 1
Power Supply
Use| or ¬ to scroll through options,
or press hotkey (1-7)
|
Built In Tests 2
Outputs
|
Built In Tests 3
Equipment
|
Built In Tests 4
System Inputs
|
Built In Tests 5
Fuses
|
Built In Tests 6
Telecmd Batts
|
Built In Tests 7
Telecmd Test
|
You can use the options in the Built In Tests menu to test the system hardware.
Option 2-7-1: Testing the Power Supply
Built
In Tests 1
1234567890123456
Power
Supply
1234567890123456
[
Power Supply
Panel Voltage
1. SELECT PARAMETER TO
VIEW
1
|
Power Supply
2
Battery Voltage
To select parameter:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press hot key
[
2. VIEW VALUE
Battery Voltage
13.54 Volts
]
Press ] when you have finished
123
Engineer Menu 2-7
Engineering Manual
1 – Panel Voltage
Displays the output voltage supplied to the auxiliary power terminals and peripherals such
as keypads. To ensure that peripherals function correctly, the voltage should remain
between 11 and 14Vdc. A voltage below this range may be caused by an excessive load or
a power supply fault. The accuracy of this measurement is ± 0.2V.
2 – Battery Voltage
Displays the battery charging voltage at the control panel. The accuracy of this
measurement is ± 0.2V.
3 – Charge Voltage
Displays the battery charging voltage at the control panel. The accuracy of this
measurement is ± 0.2V.
4 – Charge Current
Displays the battery charging current. Depending on the capacity of the battery used, this
may be up to 750mA. The value will be zero if the Discharge current (see below) is not
zero.
5 – Discharge Current
Displays the current drawn from the battery, when the panel is powered from the battery
6 – Load Current
Displays the total current drawn from the control panel's power supply, excluding the
battery load. The accuracy of this measurement is ± 50mA. The Load + Charge current
should not exceed 1.5A for an M800 or M2000 panel.
7 – Source Current
Displays the total current flowing into the panel through the 12Vdc auxiliary power
terminals. The value should be zero if the panel is correctly connected.
Option 2-7-2: Testing Outputs
Built In Tests 2
Outputs
[
Test Outputs
Panel
1
|
Test Outputs
Digi H/Wired
2
|
Test Outputs
Digi On Board
3
|
Test Outputs
Equipment
|
124
4
Use | or ¬ to scroll through options,
or press hot key (1-4)
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-7
Option 2-7-2-1 – Testing the "Panel" Outputs
Test Outputs
Panel
1
[
1. TOGGLE OUTPUTS
Outputs (* = off)
Panel Outputs On
*****
e.g. 1
Enter ouput number (e.g. 1)
to toggle output on/off
Panel Outputs On
1****
]
Press ] when you have finished
This option allows you to switch outputs 1 to 5 on and off. Outputs 1 and 2 are relay outputs.
Outputs 3, 4 and 5 are transistor outputs. Switching on an output should cause the appropriate
output LED on the PCB to illuminate.
) Outputs 2 and 5 are not available on an M800.
Option 2-7-2-2 – Testing the Digital Communicator Outputs
Test
Outputs
2
1234567890123456
Digi
H/Wired
1234567890123456
[
1. SELECT GROUP
Outputs
(* = off)
Outputs 1-8
Digi outputs on
1-8: *****6*8
r
Press r to toggle between
viewing outputs 1-8 or 9-16
Digi outputs on
9-16: ********
e.g. 1
Enter number (1-8) to toggle
output on/off
2. TOGGLE OUTPUTS
Digi outputs on
9-16: 1*******
]
Press ] when you have finished
This option allows you to switch the digital communicator outputs on and off.
125
Engineer Menu 2-7
Engineering Manual
Option 2-7-2-3 – Testing the Digi On Board Channels
Test
Outputs
3
1234567890123456
Digi
On Board
1234567890123456
[
1. SELECT DIGI
ONBOARD CHANNELS
Outputs
(* = off)
Outputs 1-8
Channels
1-8: ********
If required, press r to display
next set of channels
r
Channels
9-16: ********
Enter output number (1-8) to
toggle output on/off
e.g. 1
2. TOGGLE OUTPUTS
Channels
9-16: 1*******
]
Press ] when you have finished
This option allows you to switch on or off the 16 digi on-board channels (the 16 "software"
outputs, the status of which are transmitted via the on-board modem port). You will need to
contact the Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) for verification that the channels are functioning
correctly.
Option 2-7-2-4 – Testing Equipment Outputs
Test
Outputs
4
1234567890123456
Equipment
1234567890123456
[
1. SELECT OUTPUT
Zone no. (network 1,
device 01, output 1)
1:01:1 Remote
e.g. |
1:01:2 Remote
[
To select output:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Enter network and devic e number (e.g. 1012
for network 1, device 01, output2)
Press r to change network
Press [ to view output status
2. PRESS ENT
1:02:2 Remote
Is Turned OFF
r
Press r to toggle output on/off
3. TOGGLE OUTPUT
1:02:2 Remote
Is Turned ON
]
Press ] when you have finished
This option allows you to switch outputs connected to network devices, such as keypads, on and
off.
126
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-7
Option 2-7-3: Performing Equipment Tests
Built In Tests 3
Equipment
[
Equipment
1
Software Version
Use | or ¬ to scroll through options,
or press hot key (1-9)
|
Equipment
False Setting
2
|
Equipment
3
Confirm Devices
|
Equipment
4
Zone Resistance
|
Equipment
5
Network Devices
|
Equipment
6
Network Errors
|
Equipment
7
Default User 1
|
Equipment
Default NVM
8
|
Equipment
Test Display
9
|
Option 2-7-3-1 – Determining the Software Version
Select this option to find out which version of firmware the panel is currently using.
127
Engineer Menu 2-7
Engineering Manual
Option 2-7-3-2 – False Setting the System
Equipment
2
1234567890123456
False
Setting
1234567890123456
[
False set wards:
Ward > ***.....
e.g. 1
False set wards:
Ward > 1**.....
1. SELECT SET OF WARDS
TO BE FALSE SET
Press the ward number 1 to 8 to toggle
ward in set (number shown) or not in set
("* " displayed). A dot (".") indic ates that the
ward is not allocated to any zones
[
Select Zones
0001 Disarmed
e.g. |
Select Zone
0002 Disarmed
2. SELECT ZONES TO ARM
To select zone:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Enter zone num ber, including full network
address. For example, 1023 is network 1,
device 02, zone 3
Press r to c hoose whether the zone
should be armed or remain disarm ed
[
All outputs will
remain active
Press r to c hoose whether
outputs should be activated or
deactivated
4. EDIT TIMER VALUE
3. SELECT WHETHER TO
ACTIVATE OUTPUTS
[
4. FALSE SET SYSTEM
O=Set Selection
[Ent]=User Level
0
Press 0 to false set
Exit For Wards:Ward : 123.....
Wards Set :Ward : 123.....
5. FINISH TEST
]
TESTING COMPLETE
[ESC] to quit.
]
Press ] when you have finished
This option allows you to set the system while the premises are occupied. You can choose the
following:
1.
The wards to set.
2.
The zones to activate. Excluded zones are isolated.
3.
Whether to enable or disable all outputs (digicom, bell, strobe, etc.).
The system unsets the zones once you have finished the test.
128
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-7
Option 2-7-3-3 – Confirming the Network Devices
Equipment
3
Confirm Devices
Devic e type
[
No of devices
[ENT] to CONFIRM
002 LEC2S
Press [ to confirm and view next
device type. Press ] to exit
[
This option allows you to confirm the correct number of devices are connected to the network
ports.
It is not normally necessary to use this option, since the procedure is started automatically when
you enter your engineer code (if there have been changes to the devices attached).
) A keypad may be shown as a "LEC2". If a key is pressed at the keypad, it will be included in
the remote keypad total the next time you use this option.
Option 2-7-3-4 – Checking a Zone's Resistance
Equipment
4
1234567890123456
Zone
Resistance
1234567890123456
[
Panel Zone 1
02.173 K Ohms
Devic e type
Zone no. (network 1,
device 01, zone A)
Resistance
e.g. r
1. SELECT ZONE TO
VIEW
To select zone:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press r to c hoose zone on next network
(e.g. to change 0001 to 1001), or
Enter zone number (e.g. 0002)
1,01A Remote
02.200 K Ohms
]
Press ] when you have finished
You can use this option to view the resistance at a zone. For zones connected to the panel, the
accuracy of this measurement is better than 100 Ohms. An open circuit at a panel zone will
display as 11.463k Ohms.
The displayed resistance value for zones connected to an MSNode, MSPSU or keypad are
rounded and approximate.
Refer to page 98 for the expected resistance values for each condition at a zone.
129
Engineer Menu 2-7
Engineering Manual
Option 2-7-3-5 – Checking the Status Network Devices
Equipment
5
Network Devices
[
Device type
Zone status
(T=Tamper, H=Healthy ,
A=Activ e, S=Shorted
M=Masked)
Lid tamper status
(H=Healthy, A=Active)
Node Voltag e
Fuse status
(H=Healthy, B=Blown)
1. SELECT DEVICE
TO
VIEW S
TATUS
2:01 Remote
A-T B-H T-H
e.g. 202
2:02 MSNode
13.75 FH TH HH**
To select devic e:
· Press| or ¬ to scroll or,
Enter network and device number ( e.g.
201 for network 2 device 1.
Lid tamper status
(H=Healthy, A=Active)
Lid tamper status of any
attached keypad
(H=Healthy, A=Active)
Node Voltag e
[
2:03 RNode
13.50 FH TH ****
Not applicable on RNodes
Lid tamper status
(H=Healthy, A=Active)
Not applicable on
RNodes
Radio zone statu s
(T=Tamper, H=Healthy ,
A=Active)
Radio jamming statu s
(Clear or Jammed)
[
2:03 Zone Status
1H2H3H4H5H6H7H8A
[
2:03 RNode
RF Clear
]
Press] when you have finished.
This option allows you to check the status of zones, tampers, fuses, etc. connected to devices on
the network. The information displayed depends on the device type. Note that MRNodes may
be listed as MSNodes for a short while after you first connect them to a network.
The keypad that you are using is the first device to be displayed.
130
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-7
Option 2-7-3-6 – Viewing Network Errors
Equipment
6
1234567890123456
Network
Errors
1234567890123456
[
1. SELECT NETWORK
Network 1 0003
To select network:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Enter network number (e.g. 2)
e.g. |
Error c ount
Network 2 0254
Last error 2,01
Last error
Press ] when you have finished
]
This option allows you to view the number of data transmission errors for each network.
) You can re-set the error count to zero by pressing the 0 key. You may want to do this, then
use the option again (e.g. in 20 minutes) to determine the number of errors that are
occurring.
Transmission errors can be caused by poor terminations, intermittent cable faults, RF
interference, voltage drops, earth faults, cables for different networks routed together and
sounder cables routed with network cables. The system can operate with no ill effects with up to
20 errors in a 24-hour period.
Option 2-7-3-7 – Resetting User 1 (the default Manager User)
Equipment
7
Default User 1
[
[ENT] to DEFAULT
user code 1.
[
Press [ to confirm reset
of user 1 passcode
This option allows you to reset user 01 (a Manager user) back to the factory default code of
5678, or 567800 (if 6-digit user codes are used; see page 91). The operation is logged.
131
Engineer Menu 2-7
Engineering Manual
Option 2-7-3-8 – Applying Default NVM Settings
Equipment
Default NVM
8
[
1. SELECT THE TYPE O
DATA TO DEFAULT
Default NVM 1
Configuration
|
To select the data typ e:
· Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
· Press the hot key (e.g. 2)
Default NVM 2
Country
|
Default NVM 3
Language
|
1 – Configuration
You can use this option to set specific categories of system settings back to the factory
defaults. The default settings are listed in Table 6.
2 – Country
Use this option to select a set of defaults specific to a country. (Note that the build of
software in the control unit may not support the country you require.)
For UK systems, this option provides access to PD6662 Grade 2 or Grade 3 defaults.
3 – Language
Use this option to select another language for the display. (Note that the build of software
in the control unit may not support the language you require.)
132
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-7
Table 6. Default Settings
Settings Defaulted
User 1-9 Engineer Access
User 2-4 User Codes
User 01 code
User 01 Wards
User name
User 02 and beyond
1-1 Zones
Zone type (all zones)
Grade2 (Grade 3)
Default Value
Infinite (see note 1)
5678 (567800)
All
User 001
Not used
Not Used
(see note 2)
Zone description
Zone x
1-2 Zone Resistance
4K7/2K2
1-3-1 Ward Options - Equip To Wards
All devices
All Wards
1-3-2 Ward Options - Attributes
-01 Conf Reset
Wards: 1
-02 Unconf Reset
Wards: None
-03 Tamper Reset
Wards: All
-04 Remote Reset
Wards: None
-05 Panel Tamper
Wards: All
-06 Panel Speaker
Wards : All
-07 Aux/Bell Tamper
Wards: All
-08 Payment Timer
Wards: None
-09 Re-arms
Wards: None
-10 Secure Ward
Wards: None
-11 Bell and Strobe
Wards: All
-12 Foyer Mode
Wards: None
-13 Unset Fire
Wards: All
-14 Multiply Ack
Wards: None
-15 Entry Unset
Wards: All
-16 Entry=F/E
Wards: None
1-4-1 Outputs
-01 Panel Output 1
Walk Test
-02 Panel Output 2
Courtesy Light
-03 Panel Output 3
Set Pulse
-04 Panel Output 4
Detector Reset
-05 Panel Output 5
Unset Pulse
1-4-2 Digi Hardwired
-01 Digi H/Wired 01
Fire Alarm
-02 Digi H/Wired 02
PA
-03 Digi H/Wired 03
Alarm
-04 Digi H/Wired 04
System Set
-05 Digi H/Wired 05
Active Omit
-06 Digi H/Wired 06
Alarm Abort
-07 Digi H/Wired 07
Confirmed
-08 Digi H/Wired 08
Tamper Alarm
-09 Digi H/Wired 09
Panel Mains Off
-10 Digi H/Wired 10
General Fault
-11 Digi H/Wired 11
Tx Low Battery
-12 Digi H/Wired 12
Supervision Fail
-13 Digi H/Wired 13
-14 Digi H/Wired 14
-15 Digi H/Wired 15
-16 Digi H/Wired 16
1-4-3 Digi On Board
-01 Digi On Board 01
-02 Digi On Board 02
-03 Digi On Board 03
-04 Digi On Board 04
-05 Digi On Board 05
-06 Digi On Board 06
-07 Digi On Board 07
-08 Digi On Board 08
-09 Digi On Board 09
-10 Digi On Board 10
-11 Digi On Board 11
-12 Digi On Board 12
-13 Digi On Board 13
-14 Digi On Board 14
-15 Digi On Board 15
-16 Digi On Board 16
1-4-4 All Equipment O/Ps
1-4-5 All Output Module O/Ps
1-5-1 Ward Tmrs
-01 Exit
-02 Entry
-03 Bell Delay
-04 Bell Duration
1-5-2 System Timers
-01 Confirmation
-02 Sys Bell Dly
-03 Sys Bell Dur
-04 Anti Mask
-05 Line Fault
-06 AC Off Delay
-07 Soak Test
-08 Exit Settle
-09 2nd Entry Dly
-10 Double Knock
-11 Abort Period
-12 Abort Delay
-13 Courtesy Time
-14 Menu Time-Out
-15 Beam Pair
-16 Defer Setting
-17 Service Time
-18 Select Menu
-19 Keys Till Tamp
-20 No. of Rearms
-21 Remote Resets
-22 Double Knocks
RF Jammed
ATS Test
Always Off
Always Off
Fire Alarm
PA
Alarm
System Set
Active Omit
Alarm Abort
Confirmed
Tamper Alarm
Panel Mains Off
General Fault
Tx Low Battery
Supervision Fail
RF Jammed
Always Off
Always Off
Always Off
Pending
Always Off
030 Seconds
015 Seconds
000 Minutes
015 Minutes
030 Minutes
000 Minutes
015 Minutes
005 Seconds
030 Seconds
030 Seconds
014 Days
005 Seconds
000 Seconds
010 Seconds
060 Seconds
120 Seconds
120 Seconds
180 Minutes
010 Seconds
060 Minutes
000 Days
030 Seconds
041 Counts
000 Counts
032 Counts
002 Counts
133
Engineer Menu 2-7
-23 Tst Call Strt
-24 Tst Call Int
-25 Reset Alg
-26 Payment Time
27 Hi Security
-28 Sup Warning
-29 Sup Failure
-30 Set Status
-31 Defer Count
-32 A.Set Warning
1-5-3 Timers Exceptions
-01 to 30
1-5-4 Auto-Sets
-01 to 16
1-5-5 Time Switches
-01 to 10
1-5-6 Code Locks
-01 to 08
1-6 Setting Modes
All Wards
Engineering Manual
000 Hours
24 Hours
004 (021)
(see note 4)
000 Days
020 Minutes
16 Minutes
120 Minutes
030 Seconds
002 Counts
010 Minutes
None.
None
None
None
Timed Exit
(see note 3)
1-8-4 Setting Level Alarm Response
Full
1-9-1 General Configuration
-01 Common Ward ON/OFF
OFF
-02 Bell is an SAB/SCB
SAB
-03 View Alms Unset/P.Set
Unset
-04 Engineer/User Authorised Engr
-05 On-Line Enabled/Disabled Enabled
-06 Unset/Set First
Unset
-07 Digi Normal/Inverted
Normal
-08 Chime Audible/Visible
Audible
-09 Manual/Automatic Omits
Manual
-10 Omit Tampers Yes/No
No
-11 Global/Local Setting
Global
-12 Global/Local Unsetting
Global
-13 24hr Omit Global/Local
Global
-14 Ward/Global Bell Time
Ward
-15 Latching/Nonlatching Fire Latching
-16 Timed/Latched code o/p
Timed
-17 Latching/Nonlatching 24hr Latching
-18 Access code only/all
Code only
-19 NVM locked/unlocked
Unlocked
-20 Unshunt no exit/ &exit
No exit
-21 Ignore/View exit errors
Ignore
-22 Mimic all times/set only
All times
-23 Lo/Hi Security Eng
Lo
-24 Duress allow No/Yes
NO
-25 Keypad PA ON/OFF
OFF
-26 P.Set Hotkey
Yes
-27 Exit/Instant Set Foyer
Exit
-28 Unset Entry Wards/All
All
-29 Radio PA Silent/Audible
Audible
134
Settings Defaulted
-30 Silent Alerts
-31 Bus Cut
1-9-2 DD243
-01 Confirmation ON/OFF
-02 Sounders on Unconf/Conf
-03 Bells on Unconf/Conf
-04 After Entry No/Yes
-05 Ent KPD Lock ON/OFF
-06 Confirm 2/1 Zones
1-9-3 EN50131
-01 4/6 Digit Codes
-02 Internal/Local Sounder
-03 Instant/Delayed Alarm
-04 Tampers As Alarm/Tamper
-05 General Fault: User/Eng
-06 Tcmd Override Yes/No
-07 4k4=Masking/Fault
-08 Mask Override/Inhibit
-09 Mask Unset Flt/Alm/Tamp
-10 Mask Set Flt/Alm/Tamp
-11 AC Fail: No Rst/User/Eng
-12 AC Bypass: Always/Usr/Eng
-13 Line Fail: No Rst/User/Eng
-14 L F Bypass: Alwys/Usr/Eng
-15 Sup Fail Tamp/Alarm/Alert
-16 Reset Sup: Eng/Usr/Always
-17 Reset Jam: Eng/Usr/Always
-18 Battery Fault Alert Reset
-19 Batt. Low. Alert. Override
-20 Status Display
-21 Maks As General Fault
2-2 Time and Date
2-2-1 Set Time
2-2-2 Set Date
2-4 User Codes
2-4-1 Engineer code
2-4-2 Engineer Name
2-5-1 Downloader
2-5-1-1 Password
2-5-1-2 Site ID
2-5-1-3 Access Mode
2-5-1-4 Call Back No.1, 2, 3, 4
2-5-1-5 Modem Options
2-5-1-5-1 Rings to Answer
2-5-1-5-2 Baud Rate
2-5-1-5-3 Answer Phone
Defeat
2-5-1-6 Remote Service
Grade2 (Grade 3)
Default Value
N (audible)
Unconfirmed
ON
Unconfirmed
Unconfirmed
No
OFF
2 Zones
4 (6)
Internal
Instant
Alarm
User
No
Fault
Override
Fault
Alarm
User
Always
User
Always
Alert (Tamper)
User (Eng)
User (Eng)
Auto
Never
Timed
No
00:00
As per s/w date
1234 (123400)
Engineer
Blank
Blank
Off
Blank
5 rings
1200
Disabled
2-5-1-6-1 Enable
No
2-5-1-6-2 Call Number
Blank
2-5-1-6-3 Time Period
00:00
Engineering Manual
Settings Defaulted
Engineer Menu 2-7
2-5-1-6-4 Next Service
Grade2 (Grade 3)
Default Value
00:00
2-5-1-6-5 Interval
180 Days
2-1-5-6-6 Call Back
Disabled
2-1-5-6-7 Walk Test Alerts
Disabled
2-5-2 DigiCom
2-5-2-1 Comms Format
2-5-2-2 ARC Nos. 1, 2, 3
2-5-2-3 Account Nos. 1, 2, 3
2-5-2-4 Dialling Mode
2-5-2-5 Restores
2-5-2-6 CID/SIA Reports
2-5-2-7 FF Channels
2-5-2-8 Test Call
2-5-2-9 Line Fault
2-5-4 RS232 Options
2-5-4-1 Baud Rate
2-5-4-2 Remote Modem
2-6 Shunt Groups
Zones assigned
Settings Defaulted
1-7 Custom Text
1-7-1 Reset Message
1-7-2 Location Text
1-7-3 Printer Title
Disabled
Blank
Blank
Consecutive
Enabled
Full
8 FF Channels
N/A
Enabled
1-7-4 Remote Reset Msg
1-7-5 Banner Text
1-7-6 Group Names
Grade2 (Grade 3)
Default Value
CALL ENGINEER
TO RESET SYSTEM
PANEL LOCATION
TEXT NOT SETUP
MENVIER
SECURITY MRANGE SYSTEM
RING A.R.C FOR
REM. RESET CODE
Blank
Blank
Notes:
1. The control unit ignores this timer until the user
accesses the menu. Once the user selects the menu
the display shows 4 hours and the timer starts from
there on.
2. For Grade 3 requirements, you may need to enable
the Masking attribute on specific zones.
3. There are various options that you can select and still
comply, for example: Final Exit,Exit Terminate, or Lock
Set.
4. 21 is the lowest algorithm that generates 6 digit reset
codes for Grade 3 requirements.
38400
Disabled
None
Option 2-7-3-9 – Built In Tests, Equipment, Test Display
Equipment
Test Display
9
[
8888888888888888
8888888888888888
]
Press [ when you have
finished
You can use this option to test the LCD on the keypad you are currently using. The "8" character
should be displayed in each location of the LCD.
135
Engineer Menu 2-7
Engineering Manual
Option 2-7-4: Checking the Status of System Inputs
Built
In Tests 4
1234567890123456
System
Inputs
1234567890123456
[
1. SELECT INPUT TYPE
System Inputs 1
PSTN Line Status
To select input type:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1-5)
e.g. |
System Inputs 2
Ext L.F. Status
[
2. VIEW STATUS
Ext L.Flt Status
PASS
Press ] when you have finished
]
This option enables you to check the status of inputs to the control panel (e.g. the PSTN line
status and the panel lid tamper).
Option 2-7-5: Checking the Status of Fuses
Built
In Tests 5
1234567890123456
Fuses
1234567890123456
[
1. SELECT FUSE TYPE
Fuse Status
Auxiliary
1
e.g. |
Fuse Status
Bell
2
To select fuse:
Press | or ¬ to scroll, or
Press the hot key (1-4)
[
2. VIEW STATUS
Bell Fuse
Healthy
]
Press ] when you have finished
You can use this option to check the status of the automatically-resettable polyfuses on the
control panel PCB. You need to remove the load completely to reset a fuse.
Option 2-7-6: Checking the Telecommand Batteries
Built In Tests 6
Telecmd Batts
[
Telecommand or PA numbe r
2:01:2 Batt Low
]
136
OR
No batteries low
Press] when you have finished.
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-7
This option lists the Network:Node:Device number of any PA or telecommand that has sent a
low battery signal.
Option 2-7-7: Telecommand Test
Built In Tests 7
Telecmd Test
[
MRNode name
Telecommand numbe r
Telecommand tex t
SELECT TELECOMMAN
TO TES
T
2:01:1 RNode
John’s Telecmd
|
2:01:2 RNode
Marthas Telecmd
To select the telecommand :
· Press a telecommand butto n, or
· Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
· Enter telecommand number ( e.g. 2012)
[
Current signal strength
(previous lowest)
Battery
H=Healthy, L= Low
2:01:2 RNode
9(5) Bat-H
]
Press] when you have finished.
Note:
When you press] the control unit leaves the
previous lowest signal strength unchanged.
If you press[ at this point the control unit
clears the previous lowest signal strength and
updates it with the current signal strength.
Use this option to test the signal strength and battery health of a telecommand.
137
Engineer Menu 2-8
Engineering Manual
Option 2-8: Viewing or Printing the Log
Eng 2 Menu 8
Log Functions
Use | or ¬ to scroll through options,
or press hot key (1-5)
[
Log Functions
View Log
1
|
Log Functions
Print Log
2
|
Log Functions 3
View Access Log
|
Log Functions 4
Print Access Log
|
Log Functions
System Print
5
|
Option 2-8-1: Viewing the Event Log
Log Functions
View Log
1
[
1. SELECT EVENT TO
VIEW
Event type
UNSET WARDS:10:37:10 25/01
Event time
and date
e.g. |
SET WARDS:10:35:57 25/01
]
To select the event to view:
Press | or ¬ to scroll through the log sequentially, or
Enter event type key
For some event types, pressing r toggles on/off the
display of additional inform ation about the event
Press ] when you have finished
You can use this option to view the system log. The log contains the date and time of system
events, such as wards being unset, zones omitted, duress code activations and communications
problems. For details of each event code displayed, see page 140.
The number of events recorded in the log is model specific.
Press | or ¬ to scroll through the log (| displays earlier events).
138
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-8
You can enter one of the following keys to view events of a specific type. (You may have to wait
a short period for the results to be displayed.)
1
Alarms
2
24 Hour Alarms
3
Fire Alarms
4
PA Alarms
5
Zone Tampers
6
User Codes
7
Set Wards
8
Unset Wards
9
Entry
Pressing 0 allows you to view events from a specified offset (position) in the log.
Option 2-8-2: Printing the Event Log
Log
Functions 2
1234567890123456
Print
Log
1234567890123456
[
1. SPECIFY NUMBER OF
EVENTS TO PRINT
How many events?
0030
e.g. 0020
With offset of:0040
e.g. [
To specify the number of events to print:
Press | or ¬ to scroll the number, or
Enter the number directly
Specify the offset, then press
[ to begin printing
1. SPECIFY AN OFFSET
If a printer is connected to the control unit, you can print some or all of the events recorded in
the log.
Choose the number of events to print, then press [. Similarly, specify the offset, then press [.
If, for example, you choose to print 10 events with an offset of 50, the system will print events
50-59 (with event number 1 being the most recent). There may be more than one printed line
per log event.
If you want to stop the current print job, select the option again, but specify zero for the
number of events.
Once you have used the Print Log option, the system goes into online printing mode, where
every action is immediately printed. Switch off the printer to stop all printing.
Option 2-8-3: Viewing the Access Log
The access log stores every use of a user code of type Access (please refer to the Manager's
Manual). Press | or ¬ to scroll through the log (| displays earlier events).
139
Engineer Menu 2-8
Engineering Manual
Option 2-8-4: Printing the Access Log
You can use this option to print the access log. The option operates the same way as Engineer
option 2-8-2.
Option 2-8-5: Printing System Parameters
Log Functions
System Print
5
[
Configuration
Print : No
To select an item to print:
Press | or ¬ to scroll through, then press r
e.g. |
Users
Print : No
1. SELECT ITEMS TO
PRINT
1
2
2. BEGIN PRINTING
[
Press [ to begin printing
You can use this option to print details of how the system is set up. You can select the following
items to print.
1 – Configuration
Prints the details of all configuration options (page 84).
2 – Users
For the engineer and each defined user, this prints the user number, name, type, wards,
auto-set wards, auto-unset wards and allocated menus.
3 – Zones
For each defined zone, this prints the zone number, type, wards, description, attributes
and resistances.
Log Event Codes
Event
--- NO EVENT --### LECS or REMS
### NODE R# ADD
### NODE R# LOST
### NODE R# TAMP
### NODE'S
### XNODE'S
#### OFF TEST
#### OMITTED
#### REINSTATED
#,## AUX FAULT
140
Description
Not used
The number of LEC or keypads logged on to system after a re-learn
Keypad added to MSNode/MSPSU. First # is the network No. Next ## is the device
No. R# is the keypad No.
Keypad removed from MSNode/MSPSU
Tamper on keypad attached to MSNode/MSPSU
The number of Nodes logged on to the system after a re-learn
The number of XNodes logged on to the system after a re-learn
Zone number #### taken off test
Zone number #### omitted
Zone number #### reinstated
Network #, device No. ## MSPSU Aux fuse active
(this record may appear together with “#,## PSU FUSE”)
Engineering Manual
#,## LEC LOST
#,## LEC TAMPER
#,## NODE ADDED
#,## NODE FUSE
#,## NODE LOST
#,## NODE TAMPER
#,## PSU FUSE
#:## PSU TAMP
#,## REM ADDED
#,## REM LOST
#,## REM TAMPER
#:## RF CLEAR
#:## RF JAMMED
#,## XNODE ADDED
#,## XNODE FUSE
#,## XNODE LOST
#,## XNODE TAMP
24 Hr WARDS:24H RESTORE ####24Hr ALARM ####
24HR OMIT:24HR REINST:ABORT ON WARDS:ACCESS ####
ACCESS FAILED
ACCESS ZONE ####
ALARM ####
ALARM WARDS:
ATE L.F. ALL
ATE L.F. RESTORE
ATE L.F. SINGLE
AUTOSET # OFF
AUTOSET # ON
AUX RESTORE ####
BELL TAMPER
AUXILIARY ####
AUXILIARY # TAMP
AUXILIARY FUSE
BATTERY FAULT
BATTERY LOAD TST
BATTERY LOW
BATTERY MISSING
BATTERY RESTORE
BEAM PAIR ####
BELL BOX TAMPER
BELL FUSE
BELL TAMP OMIT
BELL TESTED:BELLS ACTIVE:CHANGE CODE ###
CHNG CODE ####
CHNG TAG ####
CNFG CHANGE ####
Engineer Menu 2-8
Network #, device No. ## is a LEC that has been removed
Network #, device No. ## is a LEC that has a tamper condition
Network #, device No. ## is a Node that has been added to the system
Network #, device No. ## is a Node that has a tripped fuse
Network #, device No. ## is a Node that has been removed
Network #, device No. ## is a Node that has a tamper condition
Network #, device No. ## MSPSU keypad or Network fuse active
There is a tamper on a smart PSU
Network #, device No. ## is a remote keypad that has been added to the system
Network #, device No. ## is a remote keypad that has been removed
Network #, device No. ## is a remote keypad that has a tamper condition
Radio node not jammed
Radio node jammed
Network #, device No. ## is a XNode/MSNode that has been added to the system
XNode/MSNode fuse failed
Network #, device No. ## is a XNode/MSNode that has been removed
XNode/MSNode lid tamper
24 Hour Alarm on wards
24 Hour Alarm on zone #### reset
24 Hour alarm from zone number ####
24 Hour group omitted in wards
24 Hour group reinstated in wards
Alarm aborted on wards
Passcode entered for user number ####
Access failed due to code lock in operation
Entry zone #### activated
Alarm from zone number ####
Alarm in wards
All networks from a communicator to an ARC are unavailable
The network connection from a communicator to an ARC has been restored
A network connection from a dual-path communicator to an ARC is unavailable
Autoset timer off
Autoset timer on
Technical alarm from zone number #### reset
bell tamper
Technical alarm from zone number ####
Not used
Auxiliary Fuse failed
Not used
Battery load test carried out
Battery voltage is low
Battery is not connected
Battery restored to healthy condition
First activation of a beam pair zone number ####
Not used
Bell fuse tripped
Bell tamper omitted after confirmation timer has expired
Bell tested for wards
Bell active for wards
User code for user ### changed
User code changed for user ####
User tag changed for user ####
Configuration change for user ####
141
Engineer Menu 2-8
CODE ####
CODE LOCK # OFF
CODE LOCK # ON
CODE LOCKED ####
CODE TAMPER
COMMS FAILED
COMMS TEST CALL
CONFIG CHANGE ##
DATE CHANGED AT
DATE CHANGED TO
DEFAULT USER
DEFAULT USER ####
DEFERRED SET:DL DISCONNECT FL)
DL DISCONNECT OK
DURESS CODE ####
ENG HW DEFAULTED
ENGINEER ARRIVES
ENGINEER DEPARTS
ENTRY TIME-OUT:ENTRY ZONE ####
EXIT CANCELLED:EXIT STARTED:EXT LINE FAULT
EXT LINE RESTORE
FACTORY RESTART
FAULT 4K4 ####
FIRE ALARM ####
FIRE RESET:FIRE WARDS:FIRST KNOCK ####
FROM REMOTE #,##
HI-SECURITY SET:
ID LOOP RESTORED
ID LOOP SHORTED
KEYPAD PANIC ###
KEYSWITCH ###
LOCAL ON LINE
LOCAL SERV CALL
LOCAL SERV END
LOCKSET #### ON
LOCKSET #### OFF
LOCKSET WARD ON
MAIN POWER ON
MAINS POWER OFF
MASK ALRM S ####
MASK ALRM U ####
MASK FLT S ####
MASK FLT U ####
MASK TMP S ####
MASK TMP U ####
MENU TIMEOUT ####
MODEM LOCKOUT
142
Engineering Manual
Passcode entered for user number ####
Code lock number # is off
Code lock number # is on
User number #### attempted to use their passcode whilst locked-out
Keypad locked out for 5 minutes due to invalid entry of passcode
On-board modem failed to communicate with ARC
Communications test call started
Configuration change for user ##
System date changed at
System date changed to
User 01 (manager) code defaulted
Not used
Deferred set on wards
Downloader disconnected incorrectly
Downloader disconnected
Duress alarm from user number ####
Panel factory reset
Engineer is logged on the system
Engineer is logged off the system
Entry mode timed out for wards
Entry mode started from zone number ####
Exit mode cancelled for wards
Exit mode started for wards
Not used
Not used
Factory default loaded
Zone has 4k4 fault
Fire alarm from zone number ####
Fire Alarm reset
Fire alarm on wards
First activation of zone number #### (zone with Double-Knock attribute)
Not used
Wards set using “High Security” feature
Short circuit cleared from ID loop
ID loop is short-circuited
Panic alarm raised from keypad (buttons 1 and 3 pressed)
Keyswitch zone #### activated
Local connection with Downloader
Local connection with Downloader
Not used
Lock set zone #### activated
Lock set zone #### deactivated
Lockset for ward enabled
Mains power applied to control panel
Mains power removed from control panel
Mask set alarm
Mask unset alarm
Zone #### masked when set
Zone #### masked when unset
Masking zone #### masked when set
Masking zone #### masked when unset
System timed out user ####, and returned to the normal standby screen
Modem locked-out (4 failed attempts made via Lineload)
Engineering Manual
NETWORK # FUSE
NODE TAMP OMIT
NORM. REST. ####
OCCUPANCY SET
ON LINE TO #
ON-SITE RESTART
PA WARDS:PANEL LID TAMPER
PANEL STARTED
PANEL TAMP OMIT
PANIC ALARM ####
PANIC CODE ####
PANIC REST. ####
PAYMENT EXPIRED
PSTN FAULT
PSTN RESTORE
PSU BATT A ####
PSU BATT H ####
PSU FUSE A ####
PSU FUSE H ####
PSU PWR A ####
PSU PWR H ####
REARM ,OMIT ####
REARM SYSTEM
REARM TAMP OMIT
REARM WARDS:REINST WARDS:REM COMMS FAILED
REM RESET ACTIVE
REM RESET FAILED
REM RESET PASSED
REM SERVICE CALL
REM SVC COMPLETE
REM SVC INCALL
REM SVC OUTCALL
REM TAMPER
REMOTE ON LINE
RESET WARDS:RF PA #:##:#
RF SET #:##:#
RF UNSET #:##:#
SEC KEY NO ####
SERVICE CALL END
SERVICE REQUIRED
SET EXT L.FAULT
SET FAIL ####
SET FAIL WARDS:SET GENERAL FLT
SET NO ACTIVITY
SET PSTN FAULT
SET PSU BATT FLT
SET PSU FUSE FLT
SET PSU PWR FLT
Engineer Menu 2-8
Network # polyfuse tripped
MSNode/MSPSU tamper omitted after confirmation timer expired
Normal alarm restore
System set with people on site
Online to remote PC
On-site restart
PA alarm on wards
Control panel lid tamper
System powered up
Panel lid timer omitted after confirmation timer expired
PA Alarm from zone number ####
PA code from user number ####
Panic Alarm on zone #### restored
System payment timer has expired
Telephone line fault detected
Telephone line fault restored
PSU Battery zone #### active
PSU Battery zone #### healthy
PSU Fuse zone #### active
PSU Fuse zone #### healthy
PSU Power zone #### active
PSU Power zone #### healthy
Zone #### omitted after confirmation timer has expired
System rearmed
Wards re-armed
Wards reinstated
A remote service call failed
Remote reset via the REM RESET input terminal (RedCARE)
Remote reset failed
Remote reset successfully carried out
Remote service call in progress
The remote service call was completed successfully
A PC has made an incoming remote service call to the control unit
The panel started a remote service call to a PC
Not used
The panel is connected to a remote PC
User or engineer has reset wards
Telecommand PA button pressed
Telecommand set button pressed
Telecommand unset button pressed
Security key operated on zone number ####
Not used
System requires a service visit (Service Timer expired)
System set with external line fault
Set fail caused by zone ####
Set fail for wards
System set with a general fault present
Not used
System set with a line fault present
System set with a PSU Battery fault present
System set with a PSU Fuse fault present
System set with a PSU Power fault present
143
Engineer Menu 2-8
SET SUPER WARN:SET WARDS:SET WITH AC FAIL
SET WITH FLT 4K4
SET WITH MSK FLT
SH.KEY OFF ####
SH.KEY ON ####
SHNT #### REINST
SHUNT CODE ####
SHUNT END ####
SHUNT GROUP ##
SHUNT START ####
SHUNT ZONE ####
SILENT PA ####
SUMMER CHANGED
SUMMER TIME SET
T.SWITCH # OFF
T.SWITCH # ON
TAMP 1 OMIT
TAMP ZONE ####
TAMP. REST. ####
TAMPER ####
TC #:##:# BAT LO
TC #:##:# BAT OK
TECHNICAL ####
TEST FAIL ####
TEST TOTAL 00##
TEST ZONE ####
TIME CHANGED AT
TIME CHANGED TO
TX #:##:# SUP FL
TX #:##:# SUP OK
TX #### SUP OK
TX #### SUP WARN
TX #:##:# BAT LO
TX #:##:# BAT OK
UNSET WARDS:UNSHUNT GROUP ##
USER #### DELETED
WALK TESTED LOG
WALK TESTED:WALK TST OVERDUE
WARD CONFIRMED:WARD ENTRY:WARD SET FAIL:WARD TAMPER:WARDS LOCKED:WARDS UNLOCKED:WINTER CHANGED
WINTER TIME SET
WLK TST FAIL LOG
ZONE TESTED ####
144
Engineering Manual
Log message displayed when the panel has been set with supervision warning on
radio zone(s)
Wards set
Wards set with a mains fault present
System set with 4k4 zone fault
System set with zones masked
Shunt key zone #### deactivated
Shunt key zone #### activated
Shunted zone #### reinstated
User #### of type "Shunt" entered passcode to isolate zones
Not used
Shunt Group ## used to isolate zones
Not used
Zone #### shunted
Silent Panic Alarm zone #### activated
Not used
Time changed at Summer changeover date
Time switch number # off
Time switch number # on
Not used
Not used
Not used
Tamper alarm from zone number ####
Telecommand has a low battery
Telecommand has a healthy battery
Technical zone #### activated
Zone number #### failed whist on test
Total number of zone tested during walk test
Not used
Time changed at specified time
Time changed to specified time
Supervision failure on radio zone
Supervision no longer failed on radio zone
Supervision is no longer warning on a radio zone
Supervision warning on radio zone
Radio zone reports transmitter low battery
Radio zone reports transmitter battery healthy
Ward unset
Shunt Group ## used to reinstate zones
User number #### deleted
Not used
Wards walk tested
The panel raised an alert that a walk test was due, but a user did not acknowledge the alert.
Ward confirmed alarm
Ward entry
Ward failed to set
Ward in tamper condition
Wards locked via security key zone
Wards unlocked via security key zone
Not used
Time changed at Winter changeover date
Not used
Zone number #### tested during walk test routine
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-9
Option 2-9 Telecommand Configuration
Use this option when a MRNode is fitted to the system and you wish to program the function of
telecommand buttons. Note that the MRNode must have “learned” the identity of the
telecommands first.
Eng 2 Menu 9
Telecmd Config
[
Indicates device
telecommand is on
Network 2, device
1, telecommand 1
1. SELECT TELECOMMAND
2:01:1 RNode
e.g. |
2.01.2 RNode
[
Telecommand typ e
>Telecmd Type
Global
To select a telecommand :
· Press a telecommand butto n, or
· Press| or ¬ to scroll, or
· Enter the telecommand number
(for example 2012)
Press[ to save changes and
continu e.
2. SELECT TYPE
[
Telecmd Type
>Global
e.g. |
Press| or ¬ to select telecommand
type.
Telecmd Type
>Local
[
Press[ to save changes and
continu e.
3. PROGRAM BUT
TONS
Button Number and function
>Button 1 ^Set
Group 1
Setting Group(s) assigned
to telecommand
e.g. |
Press| or ¬ to select telecommand
butto n.
Button 2 ^Set
Group >1
e.g. 2
Press the relevant setting group
numbe r.
Button 2 ^Set
Group >2
[
Press[ to cycle through buttons 1
to 3, then press [ to save
changes and continu e.
>Button 4 vUnset
Ward
12345678
[
Button 4 vUnset
Ward > 12345678
e.g. 345678
Press the relevant ward number to
add or remove ward s. * indicates
telecommand is not in war d.
Button 4 vUnset
Ward > 12******
[
Name appears here if
already assigned.
4. NAME TELECOMMAND
Telecommand Name
[
^elecommand Name
cursor
Use the keys as on a mobile phone
(see Appendix A of Engineering
Manual). Press| or ¬ to move
cursor to next characte r. Press[ to
save changes and continu e.
145
Engineer Menu 2-9
Engineering Manual
Step 1 – Select Telecommand
The four digit number at the top left corner of the display indicates the telecommand to be
programmed:
The first digit is the network number.
The next two digits specify the device address of the MRNode on the network bus.
The final digit specifies the telecommand.
When you first connect an MRNode, or if you have just taken an MRNode
out of learn mode, the control unit may not recognise it immediately. The
control unit may initially display an MRNode as follows (for example):
MSNode
2:04:1 MSNode
Not Learned
MRNode (in
learn mode)
1:01:1 Not Used
Not Learned
The display will change to RNode once the control unit has adjusted itself to
the new device. Once the control unit recognises the MRNode then the
control unit will display its bus address as (for example):
Devic e type (MRNode)
Network 1, devic e 1,
zone 1
1:01:1 RNode
Not Learned
No radio devic es
learned by this node.
Step 2 – Select Telecommand Type
Press ¬ or |, or key in a number 0 to 2, to select one of the following:
1 – Global
Allows a telecommand to set or unset any ward allocated to its buttons from any MRNode
(see “Buttons” below). Note that this option may be overridden by the value of Option
45:11 Global/Local Setting and Option 45:12 Global/Local Unsetting
2 – Local
Allows a telecommand to set/unset wards only if the ward has been allocated to the
MRNode which receives the transmission. (See Option 26 Assign Equipment to Wards.)
The control unit will not set/unset any other wards, even though they may be allocated to
buttons on the telecommand in the “Buttons” options (see below).
3 – Unused
The control unit will ignore any telecommand programmed as Unused, even though it
may still be learned by an MRNode.
146
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-9
Step 3 – Program Buttons
The control unit identifies each button on a telecommand by a number. The keypad display
indicates these buttons by showing the numbers followed one of the symbols “^, <, > or v” to
indicate the position of the button on the telecommand, as shown in Figure 9):
Button
A
B
72xr series
1
2
3
4
Displayed as
1^
2<
3>
4v
Newer 72xr series
and i-fb01
Figure 9) Telecommand Button Numbering
Press ENT repeatedly to step through each of the buttons in turn, followed by the “1+4” button
combination.
Buttons 1 to 3: operate setting ward groups. Press any key 1 to 4 (or 1 to 8 on the M2000) to
specify which ward group that button should set.
Button 4 always unsets wards. Press any key 1 to 8 to specify which ward(s) button 4 will unset.
(Note: The system allocates to button 4 any wards in groups you select for buttons 1 to 3. You
may override this selection if you choose.)
On a 722r and 727r button combination 1 + 4 always generates a PA. Press any key 1 to 8 to
specify which wards the PA alarm will be associated with.
There are several models of PA transmitter. Some have two buttons and some have one button.
To start a PA on two button transmitters press both buttons at the same time for more than one
second.
When you are programming PA transmitters you cannot program the buttons to set or unset
wards. Use the “Button PA” screen in option 8-4 to allocate PA transmitters to wards, and the
“Telecommand Name” screen (below) to give the PA a meaningful name.
Step 4 – Program Telecommand Name
The top line shows the current telecommand name.
Press ENT if you wish to change the name.
Press numeric keys repeatedly to enter the text of the name (see Appendix A).
The bottom line of the display shows a “^” cursor symbol to indicate where the next character
will go. After every character entry move the cursor by pressing the Up or Down arrow keys.
Press ENT to save the telecommand name.
147
Engineer Menu 2-9
Engineering Manual
5. TROUBLESHOOTING
Frequently Asked Questions
This chapter provides answers to frequently asked questions. You may find this chapter useful
for troubleshooting purposes.
I've forgotten the engineer code. How do I reset it?
With power to the control unit already applied, momentarily short the FACTORY RESTART
terminals on the PCB. Note: If an installer has locked the NVM then this procedure will not
restore the engineer access code.
The manager code (user 1) has been forgotten. How do I reset it?
Use option 2-7-3-7 (page 131).
How do I delete users?
Set the user type in User option 2-4 to "Not in use".
Alternatively, you can delete by selecting User Codes in option 2-7-3-8 (page 132).
This also defaults the engineer and user 1 passcode.
Why is a keypad wired to an MSNode not being recognised?
You may have wired the keypad while power was still applied to the MSNode (not
recommended). Remove then reconnect the power from the MSNode, then log back in as
an engineer. You should now find that the keypad is recognised.
Why is a keypad or other device not responding correctly?
Try the following:
1.
Make sure that no two devices on the same network have the same address.
2.
Check the voltage at all points of the network across the A (+) and B (-) terminals; the
voltage should be at least 12V. If the voltage is low, follow the suggestions described
on pages 13 to 14. If an external power supply is used, follow the advice given on
page 14.
Note: If you are going to install an external power supply make sure that it has a “floating zero
volts rail” (the MSPSU has this feature).
3.
148
Check for an earth fault: Switch on the mains supply and measure the DC voltage
between the mains earth connection and the AUX +12V terminal. Caution: Do not
make contact with mains live or neutral! Then measure the DC voltage between the
mains earth connection and 0V. In both cases, the measurement should be 1V or less.
If the voltage is greater than 1V, the system has an "Earth Fault" and you should check
all cables for isolation to earth. You can do this by disconnecting cables or cores from
the control unit one at a time and re-measuring the voltage until the fault is located.
Engineering Manual
Engineer Menu 2-9
Once you have identified a faulty cable/core then you can trace along its length to
locate the fault.
Note: An external power supply that does not have a “floating zero volts rail” will cause an earth
fault if it is connected to the network(s).
4.
Make sure that the "Cable Segregation" advice given on page 9 has been followed.
Check that equipment is not sharing cables. For example detectors, speakers,
expanders and keypads should all be wired with their own cables.
5.
Check for AC induced currents: Set the meter to measure low AC voltages and
measure the voltage between the mains earth connection and the AUX +12V terminal,
then between the mains earth connection and 0V. The measurement should be less
than 6Vac in both cases. If the reading is greater than this, try to locate the source of
the interference (e.g. radio transmitters or electrical machinery). If the reading is
between 6 and 10Vac, installing a 12V Spike Suppressor (for example the ACT1313)
should help to reduce the effect. Connect the suppressor to 12V, 0V and mains earth.
Note; Avoid AC induction by making sure that the alarm cables do not run next to cables
carrying AC current, such as mains cables, mains switch boxes and category 5 (Cat5)
data cables.
If it is necessary to use screened cable, refer to the advice given under the heading
"General Wiring Considerations" in the M800 or M2000 Installation Instructions.
6.
Check that cables do not exceed the maximum specified distances given on page 9. A
Networker Interface Board (NIB) can be used to increase cable distances (see page
11).
7.
Make sure that no more than 3 branches are star connected to a control unit (see
page Figure 3) Maximum Distances to MSNodes).
8.
Use option 2-7-3-6 (page 131) to check for network (data transmission) errors.
9.
Check the AC voltage on the secondary side of the transformer in the control unit (i.e.
between the wires going from the transformer to the PCB). Set your meter to AC. You
should obtain a reading of between 17 and 21 Vac.
If the secondary voltage is low, with your meter still set to AC, check that the mains
voltage between Live and Neutral coming into the control unit transformer is between
225 and 254 Vac. WARNING: Mains voltages can cause serious injury!
10. If you think there may be a problem with a device such as a keypad: a) temporarily
disconnect all devices from a network at the control unit, b) wire the suspect keypad
(or other device) to that network on the control unit using a short length of new cable.
If the keypad (or other device) now works correctly, this indicates a problem with the
original cable run, the terminations or the output from the device that it was
connected to. If it still does not work correctly, there is possibly a fault with the device
itself.
Why are false alarms occurring?
Ensure that detectors have been positioned and installed correctly, in accordance with
normal good practice.
149
Engineer Menu 2-9
Engineering Manual
Follow the advice given for "Why is a keypad or other device not responding correctly?".
Check the resistance of the wiring to the zone sensor: disconnect and short the two zone
cores at the sensor end, then disconnect the same cores at the control unit and measure
the resistance between them. This must not exceed 100 Ohms.
Why is there strange text displayed at a keypad?
Follow the advice given for "Why is a keypad or other device not responding correctly?".
Why is the system indicating that remote keypads or other devices have been removed?
Follow the advice given for "Why is a keypad or other device not responding correctly?".
No keypads are responding. What should I do?
Try the following in order:
1.
Check that mains is connected to the control unit and/or a charged battery is
connected.
2.
Perform a factory restart – keep the "FACTORY RESTART" pins shorted while applying
power to the control unit. Note: all programming will be lost!
3.
Check that the control unit is powered up and that the "HEARTBEAT" LED on the PCB
is flashing once per second. If it is not, the control unit will need to be replaced.
How do I switch on the internal communicator?
Choose a setting other than Disabled in option 2-5-2-1 (page 110), and make sure
that all other options with option 2-5-2 (e.g. 2-5-2-2) have the appropriate
settings. If the phone line is broadband, make sure that the control unit connects via an
ADSL filter.
How do I wire an anti-masking zone?
Refer to the Installation Instructions.
Can TS900 nodes be used on a system?
Yes, they can, but you cannot mix TS900 nodes with MSNodes or MRNodes on any
network. Up to 5 TS900s can be on one network, depending on control unit type.
How can I prevent a user from resetting a confirmed alarm?
Select the appropriate partitions in option 1-3-2-1 (Conf Reset , page 35). Note that
an engineer reset is not required if the user silences the alarm within the Abort Delay
period set in option 1-5-2-12 (page 64).
Can I use TSXNodes on a system?
You can connect one or more TSXNodes provided you group them on their own Network.
I’m having trouble connecting to the ARC over a landline. What can I do?
If the line is shared by a broadband connection then try fitting an approved ADSL filter to
the line. For BT landlines you can fit an ADSL01 module to the later versions of control unit
pcbs (see the M2000 or M800 Installation Instructions).
150
Appendix A: Text Keys
The following tables show how to obtain characters when entering descriptions or names at the
keypad. There are two tables: use Table 1 for options that normally require a text description.
Use Table 2 for options that normally require a numeric value, but where alphabetic characters
are also accepted.
If, for example, you want to obtain the "B" character using Table 1, press 2 twice.
Once you have chosen the character you require, press | to move the cursor to the right to edit
the next character. The ¬ key moves the cursor to the left.
Note: When you reach the end of the character sequence, the next press of the same key takes
you back to the beginning of the sequence. For example, in Table 1, the eighth press of the 2
key displays the "A" character.
Note: <sp> represents the space character.
Table A-1: Obtaining characters for options that normally require a text description
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
.
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
<sp>
,
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
0
Characters Generated (in Sequence)
?
!
1
@ "
&
C
2
a
b
c
F
3
d
e
f
I
4
g
h
i
L
5
j
k
l
O
6
m
n
o
R
S
7
p
q
r
s
V
8
t
u
v
Y
Z
9
w
x
y
z
,
#
*
'
Table A-2: Obtaining characters for options that normally require a numeric value
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Characters Generated (in Sequence)
.
,
?
!
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
<sp>
151
Appendix B: Installation Quick
Start Guide
Domestic Simple
The heart of simple domestic setting and un-setting on the M Series Control Panels is the
“Group Options” menu.
Program the functions listed on pages five and six and the system will work. If you need to add
other details such as Engineer reset then do so. Avoid altering other Configuration options as
these can change the way setting groups work.
A basic house
z0007
z0005
Zone List:
1011. Front Door
1012. Hall PIR
0001. Garage Shutter
0002. Garage Rear Door
0003. Kitchen PIR
0004. Kitchen Door
0005. Lounge Door
0006. Lounge PIR
0007. Landing PIR
0008. Bedroom 3 PIR
z0008
z0004
z0003
z0002
z0006
z1011
z1012
z0001
The diagram above shows a typical house that requires a little extra protection because a flat
roof above the garage gives easy access to Bedroom 3.
152
Engineering Manual
Text Keys
The user requirements are: full set, part set, and a second part set to allow a guest in Bedroom
3.
To program the system
Eng 1 Menu 1 – Program Zones
Zone
1011
1012
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
Location
Keypad1
–
Zone 1
Keypad 1 –
Zone 2
Panel zone 1
Panel zone 2
Panel zone 3
Panel zone 4
Panel zone 5
Panel zone 6
Panel zone 7
Panel zone 8
Type (Hot Key)
Final Exit (7)
Attributes
Wards
123
Description
Front Door
Entry (9)
123
Hall
Normal Alarm (1)
Normal Alarm (1)
Normal Alarm (1)
Normal Alarm (1)
Normal Alarm (1)
Normal Alarm (1)
Normal Alarm (1)
Normal Alarm (1)
123
123
123
123
123
123
1
12
Garage Front
Garage Rear
Kitchen
Kitchen Door
Lounge
Lounge Door
Landing
Bedroom 3
The Entry attribute allows this zone to act as Final Exit in part set
(see option Eng1 Menu 3-2-16).
Assign Zones to Wards as shown and they will be armed in the corresponding Group
Eng 1 Menu 8 – Group Options
E1-8-1 Assign Groups
Group
1
2
3
4
Wards
1
2
3
Not used (Leave as default)
Note that M2000 provides
up to 8 Ward Groups)
E1-8-2 Exit Modes
Group
1
2
3
4
Setting mode
Final Exit
Timed
Timed
Not in use (leave at default)
E1-8-3 Group Timers
Group
1
2
3
4
Exit
30 (default)
30 (default)
30 (default)
30 (default)
Entry
20
30
30
15 (default)
Delay (Bell)
0 (default)
0 (default)
0 (default)
0 (default)
Duration (Bell)
15 (default)
15 (default)
15 (default)
15 (default)
E1-8-4 Alarm Response
Group
1
2
3
4
Alarm Response
Full (default)
Local
Local
Not in use (leave at default)
153
Text Keys
Engineering Manual
Eng 1 Menu 3 - Attributes
E1-3-2-16 Entry is Final Exit in Part Set
Function
Entry=F/E
Wards
*23*
Eng 1 Menu 7 – Custom Text
E1-7-6 Group Names
Group
1
2
3
4
Text
House Full Set
Part Set
Part Set + Guest
(not used)
User Operation
To set:
Full set =
Code + 1 + ENT
Part set =
Code + 2 + ENT
Part set with guest = Code + 3 + ENT
The display shows the text description of each set mode before the user presses the ENT key.
To un-set:
Open door or come down stairs to start entry timer. Enter Code.
Commercial with Foyer Mode
Use the M Series “Foyer Mode” to set a Commercial building that includes two or more separate
areas linked together with a common area. This allows the control panel itself to set the
common area when the last occupant leaves the building.
z0006
z2011
z2012
z0007
z2013
z0005
z1011 z2016
z0004
154
z0003
z0002 z0001
z2015
z2014
Zone List:
z0001. Front Door
z0002. Foyer PIR
z0003. Loading Bay Shutter
z0004. Loading Bay PIR
z0005. Factory PIR
z0006. Factory Fire Door
z0007. Kitchen PIR
z1011. Loading Bay Door
z2011. Office Fire Door
z2012. Office BGD
z2013. Office PIR
z2014. Reception PIR
z2015. Reception BGD
z2016. Reception Entrance
Engineering Manual
Text Keys
The above diagram shows a typical example of a commercial building that could use the “Foyer
Mode”.
The end user requires each side of the building to be set separately, as the Office and Factory
staff will be working different hours. The control unit arms the common area (including the
Foyer and Kitchen) when there is no one in the building. This allows either the Factory or the
Office staff to use the facilities. For best operation, there should be two keypads: one fitted in
the Loading Bay and the other fitted in Reception. The keypad in the Loading Bay connects to
the control panel on Network 1. For convenience the Reception keypad connects to the
MSNode.
As this is commercial, use of Grade 3 Anti Masking detectors, each with three-resistor wiring.
See the MSNode or Panel Installer’s Guide for details.
To Program the system
Eng 1 Menu 1 – Program Zones
Zone
0001
0002
Location
Panel zone 1
Panel zone 2
Type (Hot Key)
Final Exit (7)
Normal Alarm (1)
0003
0004
Panel zone 3
Panel zone 4
Normal Alarm (1)
Normal Alarm (1)
0005
0006
0007
1011
2011
2012
2013
2014
Panel Zone 5
Panel zone 6
Panel zone 7
Keypad 1 – Zone 1
MSNode 1 – Zone 1
MSNode 1 – Zone 2
MSNode 1 – Zone 3
MSNode 1 – Zone 4
Normal Alarm (1)
24 Hour (2)
Normal Alarm (1)
Final Exit (7)
24 Hour (2)
Normal Alarm (1)
Normal Alarm (1)
Normal Alarm (1)
2015
2016
MSNode 1 – Zone 5
MSNode 1 – Zone 6
Normal Alarm (1)
Final Exit (7)
Attributes
Chime 1 (8)
Access (1)
Masking (6)
Access (1)
Masking (6)
Masking (6)
/
Wards
1
1
Description
Front Door
Foyer PIR
/
2
2
Shutter
Loading Bay PIR
/
2
2
1
2
3
3
3
3
Factory PIR
Factory Fire Door
Kitchen PIR
Loading Bay Door
Office Fire Door
Office BGD
Office PIR
Reception PIR
3
3
Reception BGD
Reception Entrance
Masking (6)
Making (6)
Access (1)
Masking (6)
The Access attribute allows walk through when entering an entrance door
Assign Zones to wards so that areas can be set and un-set separately
Eng 1 Menu 3 – Ward Options
E1-3-1 Equipment to Wards
Device
Network 1 – Keypad 1 (1,01)
Network 2 – MSNode 1 – Keypad 1 (2,01)
Wards
12
13
E1-3-2 Attributes
Attribute option
06 Panel Speaker
12 Foyer Mode
Wards
12
23
155
Text Keys
Engineering Manual
The keypad connected to Network 1 follows the panel speaker. Therefore the panel speaker
must be assigned to ward(s) used by that keypad. Keypads connected to MSNodes on
Network 2 will follow the MSNodes’ ward assignment.
Eng 1 Menu 5 - Timers
E1-5-1 Ward Timers
Ward
1
2
3
Exit
30 (default)
30 (default)
30 (default)
Entry
45
20
20
Delay (Bell)
0 (default)
0 (default)
0 (default)
Duration (Bell)
15 (default)
15 (default)
15 (default)
Eng 1 Menu 6 – Setting Modes
Ward
1
2
3
Mode (Hot Key)
Final Exit (1)
Final Exit (1)
Final Exit (1)
User programming
User 2 Menu 4 – Edit Codes
User
01
02
03
04
05
Code
5678
2222
3333
4444
5555
Type
Master
Standard Ward
Standard Ward
Standard Global
Standard Ward
Wards
123
2
3
23
23
Auto Sets
123
2
3
23
23
Auto Un-sets
123
2
3
23
23
A User with a “Standard Ward” code can set the wards which have been assigned to the
keypad were the code is entered. If the User has been assigned more than one ward, then
only the ward assigned to the keypad will set.
A User with a “Standard Global” code can set all wards assigned to that User from any Keypad.
The “remote” wards will follow “Instant Set” mode as there is no one present in that area to
activate the “Final Door”.
A Master user mimics the functions of a “Standard Global” code.
Digital Communicator
The onboard communicator can be programmed to meet the requirements of ATS2. This is
therefore suitable for a PD6662:2004 Grade 2 installation.
The communicator must be connected to a PSTN phone line.
156
Engineering Manual
Text Keys
To Program the Communicator
Eng 1 Menu 4 – Outputs
E1-4-3 Digi On-Board
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Type
System 007 Fire (default)
System 006 PA (default)
System 005 Alarm (default)
System 008 System Set (default) or System 050
Alarm Abort
System 014 Active Omit (default)
System 060 General Fault (default)
System 011 Confirmed (default)
System 033 Tamper Fault (default)
Channel 4 can be changed to Alarm Abort to reduce the number phone calls made by the
communicator.
Any channel not required can be made System 054 Always Off
Eng 2 Menu 5 – Communications
E2-5-2-1-option 2 Comms Format
Comms Format
2 Fast Format
E2-5-2-2-options 1/2/3 ARC No.
ARC No. 1
ARC No. 2
ARC No. 3
0123456789 (Issued by ARC)
0123456789 (Issued by ARC)
0123456789 (Issued by ARC)
E2-5-2-3-options 1/2/34 Account Number
Account No. 1
Account No. 2
Account No. 3
Account No. 4
1234 (Issued by ARC)
(Leave blank)
(Leave blank)
(Leave blank)
Test Call
A requirement of PD6662:2004 for communicators at level ATS2 states that there is a maximum
interval between checking of the communication link. At grade 2 this is 25 hours.
The test-call feature can be used to achieve this either by arranging a fixed time per-day call or
a call made a number of hours after the last successful communication. The method chosen
should be arranged in conjunction with the ARC.
Dynamic Test Call
The internal comms can be programmed to make a test call to the ARC at a programmable
amount of time after the last signal (of any type) was sent to the ARC.
Example of programming:1.
Program “Test Call Strt” (Test Call Start, in Engineers menu 1-5-2-23) as 000 (Default)
157
Text Keys
2.
Engineering Manual
Program “Test Call Int” (Test Call Interval, in Engineers menu 1-5-2-24) as 024 (or a period
of your choice), the internal comms will now make a test call to the ARC 24 hours after the
last signal of any type was sent
Note: To disable Dynamic Test call, leave as “Test Call Strt” “000” (Default) and leave “Test
Call Int” as 000 (default).
OR: Static Test call
Static test call will make a test call to the ARC at a programmable time interval e.g. every ten
hours.
Example of programming:1.
Program “Test Call Strt” (Test Call Start, in Engineers menu 1-5-2-23) as 003, this will make
the first test call at 03:00 (or 3am).
2.
Program “Test Call Int” (Test Call Interval, in Engineers menu 1-5-2-24) as 010 (or a period
of your choice), the internal comms will now make a test call to the ARC every ten hours
i.e. the first call will be a 03:00 the next call will be at 13:00 and then at 23:00, 09:00 19:00
and so on.
Note: To disable Static Test call, leave as “Test Call Strt” “000” (Default) and leave “Test Call
Int” as 000 (default).
158
Appendix C: Compliance Guide
This appendix explains how to configure M-Series control units to fulfil the requirements of
DD243: 2004, the ACPO PA Reduction Policy and PD 6662 / prEN 50131-1: 2004.
DD243: 2004 Compliance
Please study this section if both of the following apply:
1.
You are installing an alarm system in the United Kingdom.
2.
The system has remote signalling and requires the local Police Authority to issue a URN
(Unique Reference Number).
) Note: The installed system will fully comply with the requirements of DD243: 2004 only if it
has been designed in accordance with this section.
To comply with paragraphs 6.4.2 to 6.4.6 of DD243: 2004, select the following options.
DD243: 2002 Para:
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
Possible Installation
Unset from
outside using
a keyswitch
zone input
Exit Mode of
"Lock Set"
Keypad and
User access
code
Portable ancillary
control equipment
(with reader inside
premises)
Requires ARC
to unset
Option
E1-9-2-01
Confirmation
On/Off
On
On
On
On
On
E1-3-2-01
Confirmed
Reset
Either
Either
Engineer (or
Remote Reset)
Engineer (or Remote
Reset)
Either
E1-3-2-02
Unconfirmed
Reset
Either
Either
Either
Either
Either
E1-5-2-01
Confirmation
Time
30 – 60 mins
30 – 60 mins
30 – 60 mins
30 – 60 mins
30 – 60 mins
E1-9-2-04
After Entry
No
No
No
Yes
No
E1-9-2-05
Entry Keypad
Lock
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
E1-9-2-06
Confirm n
zones
N/A
N/A
N/A
2 Zones
N/A
N/A = Not applicable
Options E1-9-2-02 and E1-9-2-03, which select whether sounders and bells start on the
confirmed or unconfirmed alarms, may be configured as preferred but "unconfirmed" is
recommended.
Communication signalling options are required to indicate to the ARC whether the system is set
or unset and when a confirmed alarm occurs. This can be achieved using SIA or Contact ID, or
using one of the following optional output types (E1-4) with "Digi H/Wired" or "Digi On Board":
008 – System Set
009 – System Full Set
011 – Confirmed
159
Compliance Guide
Engineering Manual
ACPO PA Reduction Policy
To comply with this policy, do not enable a duress code or dual-key PA. Set E1-9-1-24 (Duress
Allow) to NO, and E1-9-1-25 (Keypad PA) to OFF.
PD 6662 / prEN 50131-1: 2004 Compliance
EN 50131-1: 2004, Alarm systems – Intrusions and Hold-up Systems – Part 1: System
Requirements, sets four grades for intruder alarm systems to provide levels of security required
for specific risks. M800 and M2000 control panels can be configured to fulfil the requirements
of Grades 1 to 3. Note: This guide does not apply to EN 50131-1:1997.
Configuring Hardware
Zones can be wired as either double-pole or FSL (fully-supervised loop), as described in the
Installation Instructions, but FSL is recommended. To allow remote servicing, FSL should be
used.
The power available for connecting external devices to the control unit depends on the battery
used and the grade to which the system is configured. Please refer to "Power Availability" in the
Installation Instructions.
The built-in modem is suitable for signalling alarms at Grades 1 and 2. If it is used, test calls
must be made (set with E1-5-2-23/24 as described below). At Grade 3, an external
communicator is needed to provide the necessary encryption.
Programming for Compliance
Option 2-7-3-8-2 provides defaults suitable for Grade 2 or Grade 3. See page 132.
160
Engineer Quick Reference
Engineer Menu 1
p20
1-1 Program Zones
Zone type:
0= Not Used
1= Normal Alm
2= 24 Hour
3= PA Silent
4= PA Audible
5= Fire
6= Technical
7= Final Exit
8= Exit Term
9= Entry
Keyswitch
Shunt Key
Tamper
Perimeter
Lock Set
PSU Battery
PSU Fuse
PSU Power
Masking
Occupancy
Security
Shock Entry
Attributes (toggle to change to YES/NO):
1= Access
Chime Tone 3
2= Double Knock
Inverted
3= Soak Test
Shuntable
4= Omittable
Beam Pair
5= Reset
Monitored
6= Masking
Non Latching
7= Entry
Supervision
8= Chime Tone 1
Activity
9= Chime Tone 2
p32
1-2 Zones Advanced
Zone resistance:
1= 4K7/2K2(CC)
2= 1K0/1K0
3= 4K7/4K7
4= 2K2/2K2
Zone Output Group
1-3 Ward Options
p34
1-3-1: Equipment to Wards
p34
1-3-2: Attributes
p35
01= Conf Reset
02= Unconf Reset
03= Tamper Reset
04= Remote Reset
05= Panel Tamper
06= Panel Speaker
07= Aux/ Bell Tamp
08= Payment Timer
09= Re-arms
10= Secure Ward
11= Bell & Strobe
12= Foyer Mode
13= Unset Fire
14= Multiply Ack
15= Entry Unset
16= Entry=F/E
p39
1-4 Outputs
Output type:
1= Panel
2= Digi H/Wired
3= Digi On Board
Follows:
1= System
2= Ward
3= Zone
If following the system:
000= Bell (SAB)
4= Equipment
5= O/M Modules
6= Custom Outputs
4= User
5= Zone Output Group
001= System Strobe
002= Switch 12 Volts
003= Detector.Reset
004= Walk Test
005= Alarm
006= Panic Alarm (PA)
007= Fire Alarm
008= System Set
009=System Full Set
010=System Open
011=Confirmed
012=Courtesy Light
013=Engineer On Site
014=Active Omit
015=Zones Omitted
016=24 Hour Omitted
017=24 Hour Alarm
018=Zones Shunted
019=Technical
020=PSTN Line Fault
021=Panel Mains Off
022=Access Code
023=Soak Test Fail
024=First Knock
025=Digi Failed
026=Digi Successful
027=Digi Active
028=2nd Entry Only
029=Entry Only
030=Exit Only
031=Exit / Entry
032=Exit Fault
033=Tamper Alarm
034=Rem Service Call
035=Code Accepted
036=Service Required
037=Reset Required
038=Strobe On Set
039=Duress Alarm
040=System Part Set
041=LockSet Unlocked
042=Set Failed
043=Shunt Code
044=Random Output On
045=Modem Lockout
046=Aux/Bell Tamper
047=Panel Lid Tamper
048=Chime Mimic
049=Monitored O/P On
050=Alarm Abort
051=Rem Call Enabled
052=Relearn Required
053=Always On
054=Always Off
055=Battery Test On
056=Panel Battery Fault
057=PSU - Battery
058=PSU - Fuse
060=General Fault
061=Mask Tamper
062=Mask Fault
063=Mask Alarm
064=Fault 4k4
065=Pending
066=Always off
067=Ext. Line Fault
068=ATS Test
069=Ready to set
070=Auxiliary Fuse
071=Bell Fuse
072=Network 1 Fuse
073=Network 2 Fuse
074-079=Always Off
080=Rem Batt Fault
081=Rem Mains Off
082=Rem Pwr Out Flt
083=Sys Batt Fault
084=Sys Mains Fault
085-099=Always Off
100=Auto-Setting
101=Always Off
102=Always Off
103=Always Off
104-108=Always Off
109=PC Output 1 On
110=PC Output 2 On
111=PC Output 3 On
112=PC Output 4 On
113-118=Always Off
119=Custom O/P 1 On
120=Custom O/P 2 On
121=Custom O/P 3 On
122=Custom O/P 4 On
123=Custom O/P 5 On
124=Custom O/P 6 On
125=Custom O/P 7 On
126=Custom O/P 8 On
127-128=Always Off
129=Time Switch 1 On
130=Time Switch 2 On
131=Time Switch 3 On
132=Time Switch 4 On
133=Time Switch 5 On
134=Time Switch 6 On
135=Time Switch 7 On
136=Time Switch 8 On
137=Time Switch 9 On
138=Time Switch 10 On
139-148=Always Off
149= Supervision Fail
150= RF Jammed
151= TX Low Battery
152= Tcmd Low Batt
153= Set Pulse
154= Unset Pulse
059=PSU - Power
161
Engineer Quick Reference
If following a ward:
00= Bell-SAB
01= Strobe
02= Switch 12
03= Det.Reset
04= Walk Test
05= Alarm
06= P.A Alarm
07= Fire Alm.
08= Set
09= 2nd Entry
10= 24Hr Alm.
11= Cnf Alarm
12= Zone Omit
13= Act.Omit
14= 24Hr Omit
15=Set Fail
16=Settling
17=Clear
18=Tamper
19=Reset Req
20=Lock-Out
21=Chime On
22= Monitor
23= Alm Abort
24= Entry
If following a zone:
1= Mimic
2= Alarm
3= Tamper
Engineering Manual
1-8 Group Options
p80
1-8-1: Assign Groups
p80
Group 1 to 4 (8 on M2000)
p81
1-8-2: Exit Modes
1= Final Exit
2= Exit Terminate
3= Timed Exit
4= Instant Set
5= Deferred Set
6= Lock Set
7= Silent Set
p82
1-8-3: Group Timers
1= Exit
2= Entry
3= Bell Delay
4= Bell Duration
p83
1-8-4: Alarm Response
1= Full
2= Local
p60
p62
17= Service Time
18= Select Menu
19= Keys Til Tamp
20= No. of Rearms
21= Remote Resets
22= Double Knocks
23= Tst Call Strt
24= Test Call Int
25= Reset Alg.
26= Payment Time
27= Hi Security
28= Supervision Warning
29= Supervision Fail
30= Set Status
31= Defer Count
32= A.Set Warning
1-5-3: Exceptions
p66
1-5-4: Auto-Sets
p70
1-5-5: Time Switches
p72
1-5-6: Code Locks
p75
162
p78
1= Reset message
5= Banner Text
2= Location text
6= Group Names
3= Printer title
4= Remote Reset Msg
3= Bell Delay
4= Bell Duration
1-5-2: System Timers
4= Instant Set
5= Deferred Set
6= Lock Set
1-7 Custom Text
p60
1-5-1: Ward Timers
01= Confirmation
02= Sys Bell Dly
03= Sys Bell Dur
04= Anti Mask
05= Line Fault
06= AC Off Delay
07= Soak Test
08= Exit Settle
09= 2nd Entry Dly
10= Double Knock.
11= Abort Period
12= Abort Delay
13= Courtesy Time
14= Menu time-Out
15= Beam Pair
16= Defer Setting
1= Final Exit
2= Exit Terminate
3= Timed Exit
4= Test Fail
5= Omit
1-5 Timers
1= Exit
2= Entry
p76
1-6 Setting Modes
25= Exit
26= Exit/Ent.
27= Exit Flt
28= Sndr Ctl.
29= Perimeter
30= Shunted
31= AlwaysOff
32= SetStrobe
33= Access
34= LS Open
35= PSU Batt
36= PSU Fuse
37= PSU Mains
38= Mask Tamp
39= Mask Flt
40= Mask Alarm
41= Security
42= Supervision Fail
43= RF Jammed
44= Tx Lo Batt
45= Telcmd Batt
46= Set Pulse
47= Unset Pulse
48= Fault 4k4
49= Ready Set
3= Internal
1-9 Configuration
p84
1-9-1: General
p84
01 = Ward OFF / ON
02 = Bell is an SAB / Bell is an SCB
03 = View Alms Unset / View Alms P.set
04 = Engr Authorised / User Authorised
05 = On-Line (Keypad) Enabled / Disabled
06 = Unset Ward First / Set Ward First
07 = Digi Normal / Digi Inverted
08 = Chime Audible /Chime Visible
09 = Manual Omits / Automatic Omits
10 = Omit Tampers No / Omit Tampers Yes
11 = Global Setting / Local Setting
12 = Global Unsetting / Local Unsetting
13 = 24hr Omit Global / 24hr Omit Local
14 = Ward Bell Time / Global Bell Time
15 = Latching Fire / Nonlatching Fire
16 = Timed code o/p / Latched code o/p
17 = Latching 24hr / Nonlatching 24hr
18 = Access code only / Access all codes
19 = NVM is Unlocked / NVM is Locked
20 = Unshunt, no exit / Unshunt & exit
21 = Ignore errors / View exit errors
22 = Mimic, All times / Mimic, Set only
23= Lo Security Eng. / Hi Security Eng.
24= Duress Allow NO / YES
25= Keypad PA OFF/ON
26= P.Set Hotkey YES/NO
27 = Exit Foyer / Inst Set Foyer
28 = Unset Entry Wards / All Wards.
29 = Radio PA Audible / Silent
30 = Silent Alerts / Audible Alerts
31 = Bus cut Conf / Unconf
1-9-2: DD243
01 = Confirmation On / Off
02= Sndrs on Unconf / Confirm
03= Bells on Unconf / Confirm
04= After Entry No / Yes
05= Ent KPD Lock Off / On
p89
Engineering Manual
Engineer Quick Reference
06= Confirm 2 Zones / Confirm 1 Zone
p91
1-9-3: EN50131
1= Disabled
2= Fast Format
3= Contact ID
4= SIA 1
p116
2-5-2-3: DigiCom – ARC Account Numbers
p117
2-5-2-4: DigiCom – Dialling Mode
p117
2-2 Time and Date
p100
1= Set Time
2= Set Date
2-3 Volume Control
p101
2-4 Change passcode and name
p101
1= Full
2= Intermediate
3= Summary
p119
2-5-2-8: DigiCom – Test Calls
p119
Press [ to start test call.
2-5-2-9: DigiCom – Line Fault
1= Disable
2-5-3: Start CallBack
2-5-1-1: Downloader – Password
p103
1= Connect
2= Upload from PC
3= Download to PC
2-5-1-2: Downloader – Site ID
p103
p104
1= Off
2= Secure Call Back
3= Unattended
p105
2-5-1-5: Downloader – Modem Options
P106
Rings To Answer:
1= 1 ring
2= 2 ring
3= 3 rings
4= 5 rings
Baud Rate:
1= 300
5= 10 rings
6= 20 rings
7= Never
2= 1200
Answer Phone Defeat:
1= Disabled
p119
4= Diagnostic
5= Remote Service
2-5-4-1: RS232 Options – RS232 Baud
1= 600
2= 1200
3= 2400
4= 4800
3=2400
2= Enabled
p120
5= 9600
6= 19200
7= 38400
2-6 Alter Shunt Groups
p120
p122
p123
2-7 Built In Tests
p123
2-7-1: Power Supply
1= Panel Voltage
2= Battery Voltage
3= Charge Voltage
p119
2= Enable
2-5-4-2: RS232 Options – Remote Modem
2-5-1-4: Downloader – Edit Call Nos.
p119
4= Basic
5 = Custom
2-5-2-7: DigiCom – FF Channels
1= 8 FF Channels2= 16 FF Channels
p102
2-5-1-3: Downloader – Access Mode
p118
3= Disable
2-5-2-6: DigiCom – CID/SIA Reports
p98
2-5 Communications
3= All
2-5-2-5: DigiCom – Restores
1= Enable
2-1 View Zones
p110
5= SIA 2
6= SIA 3
7= Extended SIA 3
2-5-2-2: DigiCom – ARC Tel No.
1= Consecutive
2= Alternate
Engineer Menu 2
p106
5= Interval
6= Call Back
7= Walk Test Alerts
2-5-2-1: DigiCom – Comms Format
p94
1-0 Goto User Menu 1
2-5-1-6: Downloader – Remote Service
1= Enable
2= Call Number
3= Time Period
4= Next Service
01= 4 Digit Codes / 6 Digit Codes
02= Internal Sounder / Local Sounder
03= Instant Alarm / Delayed Alarm
04= Tampers As Alarm / Tampers As Tamps
05= Gen/fault: User / Eng
06= Telecommand Override
07= 4k4 Masking
08= Mask Override / Mask Inhibit
09= Mask Unset Fault / Tamp / Alarm
10= Mask Set Alarm / Fault / Tamper
11= AC Fail: No Reset / User / Engineer
12= AC Bypass: Always / Healthy / Never
13= Line Fail: No Rst / User / Eng
14= LF Bypass: Always / User / Eng
15= Supervision Fail Alert / Alarm / Tamp
16= Reset Supervision Healthy / User / Eng
17= Reset Jamming Always / User / Eng
18= Battery Reset Eng / Auto / User
19= Batt. Override Never / Healthy / Always
20= Status Timed / Always / Never
21= Mask is General Fault No / Yes
4= Charge Current
5= Discharge Current
6= Load Current
7=Source Current
2-7-2-1: Outputs – Panel
p125
163
Engineer Quick Reference
Engineering Manual
2-7-2-2: Outputs – Digi H/Wired
p125
2-7-2-3: Outputs – Digi On Board
p126
2-7-2-4: Outputs – Equipment
p126
2-7-3-1: Equipment – Software Version
p127
2-7-3-2: Equipment – False Setting
p128
2-7-3-3: Equipment – Confirm Devices
p129
2-7-3-4: Equipment – Zone Resistance
p129
2-7-3-5: Equipment – Network Devices
p130
2-7-3-6: Equipment – Network Errors
p131
2-7-3-7: Equipment – Default User 1
p131
2-7-3-8: Equipment – Default NVM
p132
2-7-3-8-1: Default Configuration
p132
0= Custom Text?
1= Modem Data?
2= User Codes?
3= Configuration?
4= Outputs?
5= Setting Modes?
6= System Timers?
7= Time Switches?
8= Code Locks?
9= Autoset Times?
Zones?
Telecommands?
Equipment Wards?
Net Equipment?
Ward Groups?
Exception Periods?
2-7-3-8-2: Change Country Defaults
2-7-6: Telecommand Battery
p136
2-7-7: Telecommand Test
p138
2-8 Log Functions
p136
2-8-1: View Log
p138
2-8-2: Print Log
p139
2-8-3: View Access Log
p139
2-8-4: Print Access Log
p140
2-8-5: System Print
p140
2-9 Telecommand Configuration
p145
Location Of :1,Panel 2,Keypad
132
132
2-7-3-9: Equipment – Test Display
p133
2-7-4: System Inputs
p136
164
3= Network 1
4= Network 2
Pressing 0 before entering Engineer Menu
1 or 2 displays the following:
2-7-3-8-3: Change Language
4= Aux/Bell Tamper
5= Mains Supply
6= Remote Reset
1= Auxiliary
2= Bell
Location Option
Select PD6662 Grade 2 or 3 in UK systems.
1= PSTN Line Status
2= Ext L.F. Status
3= Panel Lid Tamper
p136
2-7-5: Fuses
You can use this screen to view the text set
up to identify the location of the panel
(page 78), and the address of the keypad.
Index
24hr Alarm ward output, 54
24hr zone
24 Hour Alarm system event, 45
24 Hour Omitted system event, 45
Global / local omit option, 86
Latching option, 87
Zone type, 22
2nd Entry Only system event, 46
4k4
4k4 fault partiton event, 58
Fault output system event, 49
Abort
Delay timer, 64
Duration timer, 63
AC Fail
AC Off Delay timer, 45, 63, 94
Bypass option, 94
Reset option, 93
Access
Access Code system event, 45
Access mode, 104
Output options, 87
Printing access log, 140
Viewing access log, 139
Zone attribute, 28
Access ward output, 56
Account number
Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC), 117
ACPO PA Reduction Policy
Compliance, 161
Active Omit system event, 45
Activity
zone type, 30
After Entry configuration option, 90
Alarm
Alarm Abort system event, 48
Full, local, internal, 22
Instant / Delayed option, 91
System event, 44
Viewing options, 84
Ward event, 54
Zone event, 58
Alarm abort ward output, 55
Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC), 111
8 or 16 Fast Format channels, 118
Account number, 117
Communication disabled, 110
Contact ID communication, 111
Dialling mode, 117
Digi On Board output type, 41
Fast Format communication, 110
Hi Security menu access option, 88
Keypad lock on, 90
Line Fault reset option, 94
On-board modem, 5
PSTN Line Fault system event, 45
Remote reset, 36
Remote reset message, 78
Reset algorithm, 65
Send restore messages, 118
Setting up the DigiCom, 109
SIA communication, 111
Tamper communication, 91
Telephone number, 116
Test Call timer, 65
Verifying channel operation, 126
Always Off system event, 48
Always On system event, 48
Anti Mask timer, 63
ATS Test, 49
Audible PA zone type, 23
Auto-Sets, 70
Auto-setting
defer count, 66
warning time, 66
Auto-Setting
System event, 51
Aux / Bell Tamper system event, 47
Aux fuse output. See
Back tamper switch, 6
Banner Message, 79
Battery
Battery Fault system event, 48, 50
Battery Test On system event, 48
Calculating voltage drop, 11
Charging current, 124
Charging voltage, 124
Current drawn, 124
Low alert override, 95
PSU – Battery system event, 48
PSU – Fuse system event, 48
PSU – Power system event, 48
PSU Batt ward event, 56
PSU Battery zone type, 26
Reset fault alert, 95
Telecommand, 136
Type, 6
Voltage, 124
Beam Pair
Delay timer, 64
Zone attribute, 30
Bell
Assigning to wards, 37
Bell Fuse system event, 50
Bell system event, 43
Bell ward event, 53
DD243 configuration, 90
Delay timer, 61
Duration timer, 61
Global / ward option, 86
Global Delay timer, 62
Global Duration timer, 63
165
Index
Output, 6
SAB/SCB option, 84
Bus Cut, 89
Button, 147
Cable
Mains power cable, 9
Segregation, 9
Types, 9
Call Back
Telephone numbers, 105
Chime
Audible / Visible option, 85
Chime Mimic system event, 47
Tone zone attribute, 29
Chime on ward output, 55
Clear ward output, 55
Code accepted system event, 46
Command summary, 162
Communication
Answer Phone Defeat, 106
Baud Rate, 106
Call Back numbers, 105
Contact ID, 111
DigiCom options, 109
Disabling communication to the ARC, 110
Fast Format, 110
Rings to Answer, 106
Setting up, 102
SIA, 111
Communicator line fault, 49
Compatible devices, 6
Compliance
ACPO PA Reduction Policy, 161
DD243, 160
EN50131, 161
Configuration options, 84
Confirmation
DD243 configuration, 89
Network devices, 129
Second alarm timer, 62
Confirmed alarm
Engineer reset, 35
System event, 44
Confirmed alarm ward output, 54
Contact ID, 111
Reporting level, 119
Tamper communication, 91
Courtesy Light
System event, 44
Timer, 64
CPA6 output module, 6, 8
Current
Battery charging current, 124
Drawn from battery, 124
Drawn from power supply, 124
Flowing through 12VDC power supply, 124
Custom output, 41, 51
Date, setting, 100
DD243
Compliance, 160
166
Engineering Manual
DD243 configuration, 89
Default
Country, 132
Engineer passcode, 17
Manager passcode, 131
NVM settings, 132
Deferred Setting
Mode, 77
Timer, 64
Delayed alarm, 91
Detector loop, 7
Detector Reset
System event, 44
Ward event, 53
Diagnostic tests, 123
Dialling mode to Alarm Receiving Centre, 117
Differences between models, 1
DigiCom
Communication failure system event, 46
Communication in progress system event, 46
Communication successful system event, 46
Inverting output, 85
Programming hardwired output, 41
Programming software output, 41
Setting up, 109
Double Knock
Assigning to wards, 37
Counter, 65
Delay timer, 63
First Knock system event, 46
Zone attribute, 28
Downloader
Access mode, 104
Activity zone type, 30
Answer Phone Defeat, 106
Baud Rate, 106
Call Back numbers, 105
Custom SIA reporting level, 119
On-board modem, 5
Online keypad option, 85
Password, 103
PC Output n On system event, 51
Port, 5
Rem Service Call system event, 46
Rings to Answer, 106
Setting up, 102
Site ID, 103
User / Engineer authorised option, 84
Duress
Disable / Enable option, 88
Duress Alarm system event, 47
Logged events, 138
P.A. ward event, 54
Panic Alarm system event, 44
EN50131
Compliance, 161
EN50131 configuration, 91
Engineer
Changing passcode, 101
Default passcode, 17
Engineering Manual
Defaulting passcode, 101
Engineer On Site system event, 44
Hi / Lo Security menu access option, 88
Keypad port, 6
Log in denied, 17
Logging in, 17
Logging out, 17
Engineer menu
Exiting from options, 18
Menu 1, 19
Menu 1 command summary, 162
Menu 2, 97
Menu 2 command summary, 164
Selecting options, 18
Engineer reset
Confirmed alarm, 35
Tamper, 36
Unconfirmed alarm, 36
Entry
Considered as Final Exit zone type, 38
Entry Only system event, 46
Second entry timer, 63
Ward timer, 61
Zone attribute, 29
Zone type, 24
Entry delay ward output, 55
Entry Unset, 38
Equipment
Assigning to a ward, 34
Testing equipment, 127
Testing equipment output, 126
Event log
Codes, 140
Contact ID transmission format, 111
Printing, 139
SIA transmission format, 111
Viewing, 138
Exceptions, 68
Exit
Exit / Entry system event, 46
Exit Fault system event, 46
Exit Only system event, 46
Ward timer, 60
Exit Entry ward output, 55
Exit fault ward output, 56
Exit Settle
Exit modes, 76
Timer, 63
Ward event, 55
Exit terminator
Setting mode, 76
Zone type, 23
Exit ward output, 55
Expander, 8
Cable distance, 9
External sounder. See Bell
False setting the system, 128
Fast Format, 110
8 or 16 channels, 118
Final Exit
Index
Lock Set zone type, 25
Setting mode, 76
Zone type, 23, 38
Fire
Latching option, 86
SIA messages, 112
Signalling when set/unset, 37
System event, 44
Viewing events, 139
Ward event, 54
Zone type, 23
Foyer Mode ward attribute, 37
Fuse
Bell Fuse system event, 50
Network 1 Fuse system event, 50
Network 2 Fuse system event, 50
Viewing status, 136
General Fault
Override option, 92
System event, 48
Global
Telecommand type, 146
Group
Assigning a ward to a group, 80
Group name text, 79
Setting mode, 81
Ward group alarm response, 83
Ward group timer, 82
Hi Security
Assigning to wards, 37
Engineer menu access option, 88
Timer, 66
IDNode, 7
Programming output, 41
Infra-red Beam Pair zone attribute, 30
Instant
Alarm, 91
Setting mode, 77
Inverted
Output sense, 59
Zone attribute, 29
Jamming
Jamming ward event, 57
Reset, 95
RF jammed system event, 52
Keypad, 7
Address, 165
Cable distance, 9
DD243 configuration, 90
Engineer's keypad port, 6
Entering text, 152
Key presses before tamper counter, 64
Programming output, 41
Sounder Ctl output type, 56
Tamper alarm, 34
Testing LCD, 135
Ward allocation, 34
Keypad PA, 88
Keyswitch
Non Latching zone attribute, 30
167
Index
Shunt key zone type, 24
zone type, 24
Language, 132
Latching
24hr zone rearming, 87
Detectors, 44, 45, 53, 54
Fire zone rearming, 86
Keyswitch, 24
LEC expander, 8
Cable distance, 9
Line Fault
Bypass option, 94
Communicator, 49
Delay timer, 63
External Line Fault system event, 49
Reset option, 94
System event, 45
Local
Telecommand type, 146
Location option, 165
Location text, 78
Lock out ward output, 55
Lock Set
Setting mode, 77
Unlocked system event, 47
Unlocked ward event, 56
Zone type, 25
Log event codes, 140
Logging in, 17
Logging out, 17
Loudspeaker
Assigning to wards, 36
Cable segregation, 9
Connections, 6
Setting volume, 101
Ward allocation, 34
Mains cabling, 9
Mains Power Off system event, 45
Manager, default passcode, 131
Masking
4k4 resistance =, 93
Anti Mask timer, 63
As general fault, 96
Fault ward event, 57
Faults, 49
Mask alarm system event, 49
Mask Fault system event, 49
Mask Tamper system event, 49
Override / Inhibit option, 93
Selecting zone resistance, 32
Set Fault / Tamper option, 93
Tamper ward event, 57
Unset Fault / Tamper option, 93
Ward event, 57
Zone attribute, 29
Zone resistance values, 98
Zone type, 26
Menu Time-Out timer, 64
MIDNode, 7
Programming output, 41
168
Engineering Manual
Mimic
Configuration option, 87
Zone event, 58
MKP1 keypad, 7
MKP2 keypad, 7
MKP3 keypad, 7
Models, differences, 1
Modem
Modem Lockout system event, 47
On-board modem, 5
Modem options, 106
Monitored
Output On system event, 48
Ward event, 55
Zone attribute, 30
MRNode, 8
Cable distance, 9
MSNode, 7
Cable distance, 9
Programming output, 41
MSPSU
Cable distance, 9
MSPSU power supply, 8, 14, 50
Multiply Ack ward option, 37
Network
Cable segregation, 9
Calculating voltage drop, 12
Checking status of network devices, 130
Confirming network devices, 129
Network 1 Fuse system event, 50
Network 2 Fuse system event, 50
Port, 5
Reducing voltage drop, 13, 14
Relearn Required system event, 48
Viewing error count, 131
Zone numbering, 21
Networker Interface Board, 11
Non Latching
24hr zone rearming, 87
Fire zone rearming, 86
Keyswitch, 24
Zone attribute, 30
Normal Alm zone type, 22
Not Used zone type, 21
NVM
Default settings, 132
Locking option, 87
Occupancy zone type, 26
Omitting zones
24hr global / local omit option, 86
Manual / Auto option, 85
Omit active zone system event, 45
Omit tampers option, 85
Omittable zone attribute, 28
Omitted 24hr system event, 45
Omitted 24hr zone ward event, 54
Omitted active zone ward event, 54
Omitted zone event, 58
Omitted zone system event, 45
Omitted zone ward event, 54
Engineering Manual
Output
Digi H/Wired output type, 41
Digi On Board output, 110
Digi On Board output type, 41
Digital communicator, 5
Equipment output type, 41
Event to activate, 43
External bell, 6
Group output source, 43
IDNode output, 7
Inversion, 59
Item to follow, 43
Keypad output, 7
Mode, 59
MSNode output, 7
Panel output type, 40
Programming, 39
Programming custom output, 41
Random Output On system event, 47
Relay, 5
System output source, 43
Testing Digi H/Wired output, 125
Testing Digi On Board output, 126
Testing equipment output, 126
Testing panel output, 125
Transistor, 5
User output source, 43
Ward output source, 43
Zone output group, 33
Zone output source, 43
Output module, 6, 8
Programming output, 41
PA
Audible PA zone type, 23
Radio PA audible/silent, 89
Silent PA zone type, 23
Telecommand, 147
Transmitter, 147
Panel Lid Tamper system event, 47
Panel output type, 40
Part sets, 2
Passcode
Defaulting, 101
Downloader, 103
Engineer, 101
Payment timer, 66
Assigning to wards, 36
Pending system event, 49
Perimeter ward output, 56
Perimeter zone type, 25
Port
Confirming number of network devices, 129
Downloader, 5
Engineer keypad, 6
Network, 5
Printer, 6
Serial, 5
Setting RS232 baud rate, 120
USB, 5
Power supply
Index
PSU – Battery system event, 48
PSU – Fuse system event, 48
PSU – Power system event, 48
PSU Battery zone type, 26
PSU Fuse zone type, 26
PSU Power zone type, 26
Remote, 8, 14
Testing, 123
Powering up panel, 16
Printer
Header text, 78
Serial printer port, 6
Printing
Access log, 140
Event log, 139
System configuration, 140
Programming
Output, 39
Zone, 20
Proximity tag, 7, 90
PSTN, 6
Bypassing line fault, 94
Checking line status, 136
Disabling communication to the ARC, 110
Line Fault system event, 45
PSU. See Power supply
PSU fuse ward output, 57
PSU mains ward output, 57
Quick reference guide, 162
Radio
Jamming output, 52
Jamming reset, 95
Jamming, ward, 57
Low battery output, 53
Low battery, ward, 57
Node, 8
PA, 89
Supervision, 30
Supervision fail output, 52
Supervision reset, 94
Supervision status, 99
Zone status, 99
Random Output On system event, 47
Ready to set output, 50
Rearming
24hr zone, 87
Fire zone, 86
Rearms
Assigning to wards, 37
Counter, 65
RedCARE STU, 49
Remote
Power supply, 14
Rem Service Call system event, 46
Remote mains off output, 50
Remote power fault output, 50
Remote reset
Abort delay, 64
AC bypass, 94
AC failure, 94
169
Index
Algorithm, 65
Attribute, 36
Confirmed alarm, 35
Counter, 65
General fault, 92
LF bypass, 94
Line failure, 94
Message, 78
Payment timer, 36, 66
Reset Required system event, 47
Reset Required ward event, 55
Tamper alarm, 36
Unconfirmed alarm, 36
Reset
Message to call engineer, 78
Reset Required system event, 47
Zone attribute, 28
RS232 port, 5
Setting baud rate, 120
Second Entry Only system event, 46
Second entry ward output, 54
Security ward output, 57
Security zone type, 27
Select Menu timer, 64
Service
Service Required system event, 47
Service timer, 64
Set fail ward output, 54
Set status, 66
Set ward output, 54
Setting
False setting the system, 128
Global / local option, 85
Group setting mode, 81
Part Set hotkey option, 88
Set Failed system event, 47
Set pulse system event, 53
Setting mode, 76
Setting pulse ward event, 58
Shock entry zone type, 27
Shunter ward output, 56
Shunting zones
Omitted shunt group system event, 45
Setting up shunt groups, 122
Shunt Code system event, 47
Shunt Key zone type, 24
Shuntable zone attribute, 29
Shunted zone event, 58
Shunted zone system event, 45
Shunted zone ward event, 54
SIA, 111
Reporting level, 119
Silent Alerts, 89
Silent PA zone type, 23
Silent Set
Setting mode, 81
Site ID, 103
Soak Test
System event, 45
Test Fail zone event, 58
170
Engineering Manual
Timer, 63
Zone attribute, 28
Software version, 127
Sounder
DD243 configuration, 89
Internal / Local option, 91
Starting panel for first time, 16
Status display, 95
Strobe
Assigning to wards, 37
Delay timer, 61
Set Strobe ward event, 56
Strobe On system event, 47
Strobe ward event, 53
System Strobe system event, 43
Supervision
Fail Alert, 94
Fail time, 66
Reset, 94
Supervision fail system event, 52
Supervision fail ward event, 57
Testing zone status, 99
Warning time, 66
zone type, 30
Switch
Back tamper switch, 6
Switch 12 Volts system event, 44
Switch 12 Volts ward event, 53
System
Output activation event, 43
Printing system configuration, 140
System event type, 43
System Full Set system event, 44
System Open system event, 44
System Part Set system event, 47
System Set system event, 44
System timer type, 62
Viewing system input status, 136
System battery fault output, 50
System mains fault output, 51
Tag, proximity, 7
Tamper
Alarm / Tamper option, 91
Assigning lid tamper to wards, 36
Assigning tamper inputs to wards, 36
Back tamper switch, 6
Engineer reset, 36
Tamper Alarm system event, 46
Tamper zone type, 25
Zone event, 58
Tamper ward output, 55
Technical
System event, 45
Zone type, 23
Telecommand, 145
Battery testing, 136
Buttons, 147
Low battery system event, 53
Low battery ward event, 57
Name, 147
Engineering Manual
Override, 92
PA, 147
Setting wards, 85
Testing battery status, 137
Testing signal strength, 137
Text, 147
Type, 146
Unset Entry, 88
Unsetting with, 38
Usetting wards, 86
Telephone number
Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC), 116
Call Back, 105
Testing
Diagnostic tests, 123
Equipment, 127
Keypad LCD, 135
Power supply, 123
Soak Test timer, 63
Telecommand battery, 136
Test Call timer, 65
Testing Digi H/Wired output, 125
Testing Digi On Board output, 126
Testing equipment output, 126
Testing panel output, 125
Text
Customising, 78
Entering text with keypad, 152
Time
Auto-Set timers, 70
Calender Timers, 67
Code-Lock timers, 75
Exceptions, 68
Setting system time, 100
System timer type, 62
Time switch overriding, 74
Time switch setup, 72
Timed Exit setting, 76
Ward group timer, 82
Ward timer type, 60
Time switch, 52
Time Switches, 72
Transmitter
Low battery ward event, 57
Transmitter low battery system event, 53
Types of panel, differences, 1
Unconfirmed alarm
Bell option, 90
Engineer reset, 36
Sounders option, 89
Unsetting
Global / local option, 86
Unset / set wards option, 85
Unset pulse system event, 53
Unset pulse ward event, 58
Wards with telecommands, 88
Unshunt & Exit option, 87
USB port, 5
User code
4 / 6 digits option, 91
Index
Access Code system event, 45
Access type, 45, 56, 87, 139
Code Accepted system event, 46
Duress Code type, 44, 88
Latched / timed output option, 86
Locked out message, 75
Panic Code type, 44, 54
Resetting the Manager passcode, 131
Shunt type, 29, 87
Standard Ward type, 34
Viewing events, 139
User event output activation, 43
User Menu 1, 96
Version, software, 127
View Exit Errors option, 87
Viewing
Access log, 139
Event log, 138
Fuse status, 136
Network error count, 131
System input status, 136
Zone resistance, 129
Voltage
Battery, 124
Battery charging voltage, 124
Calculating voltage drop, 11, 12
Measuring at Node, 130
Panel, 124
Reducing voltage drop, 13, 14
Volume of loudspeaker, 101
Walk Test
System event, 44
Ward event, 53
Ward
Assigning a ward to a group, 80
Assigning equipment, 34
Assigning zones, 30
Attribute, 35
Event, 53
Multiply Ack option, 37
Use of Double Knock counter, 37
Ward event output activation, 43
Ward group alarm response, 83
Ward group name text, 79
Ward group timer, 82
Ward Off / On option, 84
Ward Timer type, 60
Ward ready set output, 58
WebWayOne interface, 121
Wiring
Cable types, 9
Mains power cable, 9
Remote PSUs, 14
Segregation, 9
Zone
Advanced options, 32
Assigning descriptions, 31
Assigning to a ward, 30
Attribute, 28
Creating an output group, 33
171
Index
DD243 configuration, 91
Event, 58
Programming, 20
Selecting resistance, 32
Type, 21
Engineering Manual
Viewing resistance, 129
Viewing status, 98
Zone event output activation, 43
Zone Omitted system event, 45
Part No: 12039336 Issue 4
172
Download PDF